·rr
Catalogación en la fuente
Long, Eugene E.
Inglés Idiomático l. -· 8a ed. -· México : Trillas,
1990 (relmp. 2010).
219 p.; 21 cm.
ISBN 978-968-24-4000·7
l. Inglés • Estudio y enseñanza • Estudiantes
extranjeros. l. Buckwald, William. 11. t.
D· 421 'L2451 LC· PE1129.S8'L6.5
La presentación y
disposiclól) en con)l}nto de
INGLESIDIOMATICO 1
son propiedad del editor.
Ninguna parte de ~ta obra puede ser
reproducida o trasmitida, mediante ningún
sistema o método, electrónico o mecánico
(incluyendo el fotocopiado, la grabación
o cualquier sistema de recuperación y
almacenamiento de información),
sin consentimiento por escrito del editor
Derechos reseNados
© AO, 1990, Editorial Trillas, S. A. de C. V.
División Administrativa
Av. Río Churubusco 385
Col. Gral. Pedro María Anaya,
C. P. 03340, México, D. F.
Tel. 56884233, FAX 56041364
División Comercial
Calzada de la VIga 1132
C. P.09439,Méxlc~ D. F.
Tel. 56330995, FAX 56330870
www.trillas.com.mx
lil Tienda en linea
www.etrlllas.com.mx
~
l111li~e
23
1le ~ltllfellilllt
LECCIÓN 1 9
Miembro de la Cámara Nacional de
la Industria Editorial ELTffiMPOPRESENTEDELVERBOBE 9
Reg. núm. 158 EL USO DE LA PARTÍCULANOT 10
Segunda edición AO
(Primera publicada por LECCIÓN2 16
Editorial Trillas, 5. A. de C. V.)
LAS CONTRACCIONES AFIRMATNAS CON LOS
' (MS, MT, MR)
Tercera edición MI
PRONOMBRES 17
'(Ml, MA, 1·7-MM, ME, 2-lO·MX)
Cuarta edición MO
LA POSICIÓN DE LOS ADJETNOS EN INGL~S 17
Quinta edición ES
'(ET, 5-lO·TR, TI, TL, TA, LECCIÓN3 21
TM, TE, TX)
Sexta edición EO
ISBN 968-24..()732-X
LOS ARTÍCULOS A y AN 22
t (XS, XT, XR, XI, XL, XA, LOS COMPLEME~TOS CON EL ARTÍCULO INDEFINIDO 22
XM, XE, XX) EL TIEMPO PRESENTE 23
Séptima edición XO LAS PREPOSICIONES TO y IN 25
ISBN 968-24-3245-X
Octava edición 05
ISBN 978-968·24·4000·7
LECCIÓN4 28
t (OT, OR, 01, OL, OA, OM, OX, 00,
55, ST. SR, 51, SL, SA, SM, SE, SX) LAS PREPOSICIONES ON, AT, FROM 29
Reimpresión, 2010
HAY - THERE IS(THERE'S) y THERE ARE 30
THIS, THIS ONE y THESE 31
Impreso en México
Prlnted In Mexlco
., ._,
(¡¡

LECCIÓN 5 34
LECCIÓN 11 88
LA PREPOSICIÓN OF 35
36 EL TIEMPO PASAOO DEL VERBO BE 89
EL VERBO LIKE
EL AUXILIAR CAN 36 LOS MESES 92
THAT, THAT ONE y THOSE 37
LOS ADJETIVOS POSESIVOS 38 LECCIÓN 12 97

LECCIÓN6 41 EL TIEMPO PASADO PROGRESIVO 99

EL AUXILIAR COULD 101
LA PALABRA HOME 43 LOS MESES 103
EL GERUNDIO 44
EL TIEMPO PRESENTE PROGRESIVO 44 LECCIÓN 13 107

LECCIÓN? 50 HABÍA HUBO - THERE WAS, THERE WERE 108

ADVERBIOS DE FRECUENCIA 109
LA PREPOSICIÓN FOR 51 EL TIEMPO PASADO DEL FUTURO IDIOMÁTICO 112
EL FUTURO IDIOMÁTICO 53
LECCIÓN 14 118
LECCIÓN 8 59
EL TIEMPO PASADO DE LOS VERBOS REGULARES 119
LOS DÍAS DE LA SEMANA 60 LA PRONUNCIACION DE LA TERMINACIÓN ED 120
EL USO DE LAS PREPOSICIONES ON y BY 60 EL PASADO DE LOS VERBOS IRREGULARES 122
LA FORMA POSESIVA 61
EL VERBO WANT 62 LECCIÓN 15 129

67 EL PASADO DEL VERBO DO 130

LECCIÓN9
EL AUXILIARD/D 131
EL PRESENTE DEL VERBO DO 68 EL TIEMPO PASADO DE LA EXPRESIÓN IDIOMÁTICA DE
69 NECESIDAD 133
LOS AUXILIARES DO y DOES
EL IMPERATIVO 71
LECCIÓN 16 139
LECCIÓN 10 76
LOS PRONOMBRES OBJETIVOS 140
LA PREPOSICIÓN AT CON TIEMPO y LUGAR 77 LIKE CON LOS SUSTANTIVOS y PRONOMBRES
78 OBJETIVOS 142
TODO y TO MAKE
79 EL IMPERATIVO 144
EL VERBO HA VE (TENER, y HABER)
LA EXPRESIÓN IDIOMÁTICA DE NECESIDAD 80 EL USO DEL GERUNDIO CON PREPOSICIONES 146
LA TRADUCCIÓN DE LA PARTÍCULA CASTELLANA A 82 THE OOG IN THE MANGER 148
LA TRADUCCIÓN DE PARA ANTES DE UN INFINITIVO 83
REGLAS DE ORTOGRAFÍA 83 LECCIÓN 17 151

LOS PRONOMBRES POSESIVOS 152

6 ,..
7
',1

:11
~
MUCH y MANY, UTTLE y FEW 154
TO SAY y TO TELL 155
PREPOSICIONES 156

•ccitill ~
THE FOX AND THE STORK 158

LECCIÓN 18 161

LOS PRONOMBRES y ADJETIVOS INDEFINIDOS SOME,

ANY,NONONE 162
SOME 163
ANYyNOT ... ANY 163
NOyNONE 164
SOMETHING, ANYTHING, NOT ... ANYTHING, NOTHING 166
SOMF;BODY (SOMEONE), ANYBODY (ANYONE), NOT ...
ANYBODY (ANYONE), NOBODY (NO ONE) 168
SOMEWHERE (SOME PLACE), ANYWHERE (ANY PLACE),
NOT ... ANYWHERE (ANY PLACE), NOWHERE (NO
PLACE) 170
EVERYTHING, EVERYBODY (EVERYONE), EVERYWHERE
(EVERY PLACE) 171
VERBOS y PREPOSICIONES 173
THE RABBIT AND THE TURTLE 176
W®@ro~mnro~®--·--~·$-~~~~~-···
LECCIÓN 19 179 l. 1 yo 8. you Uds.
2. you tú 9. they ellos
EL EQUIVALENTE DE ¿NO ES VERDAD? 180 3. you Ud. 1O. they ellas
LAS PREPOSICIONES AL FINAL DE LA ORACIÓN 184 4. he él 11. they (cosas)
PREPOSICIONES 186 S. she ella 12. no no
THE GOOSE THAT LAID THE GOLDEN EGG 190 6. it (cosa) 13. to be ser, estar
7. we nosotros
LECCIÓN 20 193 L- ··~···-····· -···················

ORTOGRAFÍA
THE CROW AND THE PITCHER
VOCABULARIO INGLÉS-ESPAÑOL
201
204
EL TIEMPO PRESENTE DEL VERBO BE
207
Los infinitivos en inglés se fonnan colocando la partícula to antes
del verbo. Así, to be fonna un infinitivo con la partícula to antes del
verbo be. Los infinitivos en castellano se fonnan con las tenninaciones
ar, er, ir. To be equivale a ser (tenninación er) o estar (tenninación ar).
En inglés no se puede sobreentender el pronombre como en caste-
llano. Siempre hay que expresarlo.

1
8 9
! 11
1

:11 1
r~~
¡11
'1
111'
Be - Afirmativo tícula not se juntan para formar una contracción, la que se usa con gran
11 frecuencia y casi sin excepción. En la primera persona del singular la
11
1 am (yo) soy, estoy contracción es I'm not. La contracción deis notes la palabra isn't y de
you are (tú) eres, estás are not es la palabra aren't.
you are (Ud.) es, está
he is (él) es, está
¡', she is (ella) es, está Be - Negativo
it is (cosa) es, está
we are (nosotros) somos, estamos I'm not (yo) no soy, no estoy
you are (Uds.) son, están you aren't (tú) no eres, no estás
they are (ellos) son, están you aren't (Ud.) no es, no está
they are (ellas) son, están he isn't (él) no es, no está
they are (cosas) son, están she isn't (ella) no es, no está
1
it isn't (cosa) no es, no está
we aren't (nosotros) no somos, no estamos
EJERCICIO 1 you aren't (Uds.) no son, no están
Traduzca las siguientes frases. they aren't (ellos) no son, no están
they aren't (ellas) no son, no están
l. yo soy 16. estamos they aren't (cosas) no son, no están
2. tú eres 17. Uds. están
3. Ud. es 18. ellos están
4. él es 19. ellas están EJERCICIO 2
5. ella es 20. eres
6. es (cosa)
Traduzca ias !>iguientes frases.
21. él está
1[ 7. nosotros somos 22. soy l. no soy 16. no está (cosa)
8. Uds. son 23. ellos son 2. tú no eres 17. nosotros no estamos
9. ellos son 24. ella está 3. Ud. no es 18. Uds. no están
10. ellas son 25. nosotros estamos 4. él no es 19. ellos no están
11. yo estoy 26. es (cosa) S. ella no es 20. ellas no están
12. tú estás 27. tú estás 6. no es (cosa) 21. tú no eres
13. Ud. está 28. nosotros somos 7. no somos 22. él no es
14. él está 29. Uds. están 8. Uds. no son 23. ellas no están
15. ella está 30. están (cosas) 9. ellos no son 24. yo no estoy
10. ellas no son 25. Uds. no están
11. yo no estoy 26. ella no es
EL USO DE LA PARTfCULA NOT 12. tú no estás 27. yo no estoy
13. Ud. no está 28. Ud. no está
1
La palabra not se usa en inglés para negar con verbos. En general se 14. él no está 29. tú no estás
coloca inmediatamente después del verbo. En las siguientes frases 1 am 1S. ella no está 30. él no está
not, he is not, they are not, we are not, nótese que el verbo y la par-
tícula not se escriben como dos palabras separadas. Esto es muy común
en el inglés escrito. En conversación, sin embargo, el verbo y la par-

!
1.1

10 .,.. 11
1

1 :!

,ll'll
 1
1 1111
11'

11¡1
i
EJERCICIO 3 17. ¿estamos? 24. ¿es ella?
111
18. ¿están Uds.? 25. ¿somos?
Cambie al negativo.
i
19. ¿están ellos? 26. ¿están Uds.?
l. he is 9. you are 20. ¿están ellas? 27. ¿soy?
2. we are 10. we are 21. ¿eres? 28. ¿es Ud.?
3. they are 11. he is 22. ¿está él? 29. ¿estoy?
4. Iam 12. they are 23. ¿son ellos? 30. ¿estás?
1

5. she is 13. she is

6. you are 14. 1 am
7. 1 am EJERCICIO S
15. it is
8. it is 16. we are Cambie al negativo y al Interrogativo.
l. he is 9. you are
2. we are 10. we are
Be - Interrogativo 11. he is
3. they are
4. 1 am 12. they are
La forma interrogativa del verbo be se forma colocando el verbo 13. she is
antes del sustantivo o pronombre. 5. she is
6. you are 14. 1 am
am 1? ¿soy yo? ¿estoy yo? 7. 1 am 15. it is
are you? ¿eres tú? ¿estás tú? 8. it is 16. he is
are you? ¿es Ud.? ¿está Ud.?
is he? ¿es él? ¿está él?
is she? ¿es ella? ¿está ella? Be - Interrogativo Negativo
is it? ¿es? (cosa) ¿está? (cosa)
are we? ¿somos nosotros? ¿estamos nosotros? La forma interrogativa negativa del verbo be se forma colocando la
are you? ¿son Uds.? ¿están Uds.? contracción del negativo antes del sustantivo o pronombre. Fíjese que
are they? ¿son ellos? ¿están ellos? en la primera persona singular no es posible ninguna contracción con
are they? ¿son ellas? ¿están ellas? am ynot.
are they? ¿son? (cosas) ¿están? (cosas)
am 1 not? ¿no soy yo? ¿no estoy yo?
uen't you? ¿no eres tú? ¿no estás tú?
EJERCIC104 aren't you? ¿no es Ud.? ¿no está Ud.?
lan't he? ¿no es él? ¿no está el?
Traduzco los siguientes frases. lan't she? ¿no es ella? ¿no está ella?
l. ¿soy? lan't it? ¿no es? (cosa) ¿no está? (cosa)
9. ¿son ellos?
2. ¿eres? uen't we? ¿no somos nosotros? ¿no estamos nosotros?
10. ¿son ellas?
3. ¿es Ud.? uen't you? ¿no son Uds.? ¿no están Uds.?
11. ¿estoy?
4. ¿es él? aren't they? ¿no son ellos? ¿no están ellos?
12. ¿estás?
5. ¿es ella? aren't they? ¿no son ellas? ¿no están ellas?
13. ¿está Ud.? aren't they? ¿no son? (cosas) ¿no están? (cosas)
6. ¿es? (cosa) 14. ¿está él?
7. ¿somos? 15. ¿está ella?
8. ¿son Uds.? 16. ¿está? (cosa)
',1

!
,¡
1
12 13
'1''1

,ll:il
 EJERCICIO 6 11. ¿somos nosotros? 22. no es (cosa)
llli
Traduzca las siguientes frases. 12. ¿no so:nos nosotros? 23. ¿es? (cosa)
13. ellos están 24. ¿no es? (cosa)
l. ¿no soy yo? 16. ¿no está? (cosa) 14. ellos no están 25. ella está
2. ¿no eres tú? 17. ¿no estamos nosotros? 15. ¿están ellos? 26. ella no está
3. ¿noesUd.? 18. ¿no están Uds.? 16. ¿no están ellos? 27. ¿está ella?
4. ¿no es él? 19. ¿no están ellos? 17. yo soy 28. ¿no está ella?
5. ¿no es ella? 20. ¿no están ellas? 18. yo no soy 29. son (cosas)
6. ¿no es? (cosa) 21. ¿no está él? 19. ¿soyyo? 30. no son (cosas)
7. ¿no somos nosotros? 22. ¿no son? (cosas) 20. ¿no soy yo? 31. ¿son? (cosas)
8. ¿no son Uds.? 23. ¿no es ella? 21. es (cosa) 32. ¿no son? (cosas)
9. ¿no son ellos? 24: ¿no somos?
10. ¿no son ellas? 25. ¿no están Uds.?
11. ¿no estoy yo? 26. ¿no soy yo?
'1 12. ¿no estás tú? 27. ¿no están? (cosas)
13. ¿no está Ud.? 28. ¿no es Ud.?
14. ¿no está él? 29. ¿no estoy yo?
15. ¿no está ella? 30. ¿no estás?

EJERCICIO 7
1

Cambie al negativo, interrogativo e interrogativo negativo.

l. he is 9. you are
2. we are 10. we are
3. they are 11. he is
4. 1 am 12. they are
5. she is 13. she is
6. you are 14. 1 am
7. 1 am 15. it is
8. it is 16. we are

EJERCICIO 8
Traduzca las siguientes frases.

1
l. él es 6. tú no estás
1
2. él no es 7. ¿estás tú?
3. ¿es él? 8. ¿no estás?
4. ¿no es él? 9. somos
5. tú estás 10. nosotros no somos

14 15

11'1[11
 EJERCICIO 1

'~iÓII~
Traduzca las siguientes oraciones y practique leyéndolas.

l. 1 am Mexican. 13. We aren't Mexican.

il 2. You are American. 14. They aren't American.
!~
1 ¡,1 1 3. He is old. 15 . Where are they?
4. She is young. 16. Where is he?
,,,,
1 5. It is new. 17. Are you Mexican?
'! 6. We are Mexican. 18. Ar-:.1't you American?
7. They are American. 19. Isn't he young?
8. l'm not Mexican. 20. Are they old?
9. You aren't American. 21. Are you American?
1, 1

10. He isn't old. 22. Where are they?

11. She isn't young. 23. They are red.
1
12. It isn't new. 24. Aren't they sweet?
'\f®@®í:bmLlmiT~® ~-~,~~~ ~~~~~~~-~~~--~ ~~-~.--..--.
l. the el, la los, las 11. old viejo, grande
LAS CONTRACCIONES AFIRMATIVAS
2. yes sí 12. young joven
¡ 1

3. boy muchacho, niño 13. new nuevo

CON LOS PRONOMBRES
1 4. girl muchacha, niña 14. red rojo
1 1
Fíjese en las contracciones afirmativas con los pronombres. Estas
5. man hombre, señor 15. green verde
6. woman mujer, señorita, 10lamente se pueden usar cuando el verbo se complementa. En ora-
16. American americano
señora clones negativas las contracciones se pueden usar haya o no haya
,11¡ 17. Mexican mexicano
7. house casa complemento.
18. where dónde
11!' 8. car coche 19. apple manzana I'm Mexican. Soy mexicano.
9. big grande, alto 20. sweet (adj.) dulce You're American. Eres americano.
10. little pequeño, chico 21. desk escritorio You're young. Ud. es joven.
small pequeño, chico 22. brown color café He's old. El es viejo.
i She's little. Ella es pequeña.
1

MODISMOS It's sweet. Está dulce.

We're American. Somos americanos.
) l.
2.
helio hola
good-bye adiós
You're Mexican. Uds. son mexicanos.
They're boys. Son muchachos.
3. good morning buenos días They're girls. Son muchachas.
4. good aftemoon buenas tardes They're big. Están grandes.
5. good evening (para saludar) buenas noches
6. good night (para despedirse) buenas noches
7. the young man (boy) el jpven LA POSICIÓN DE LOS ADJETIVOS EN INGLÉS
the young woman (girl) la joven
¡j
8. the old man el anciano En inglés se colocan los adjetivos antes de los sustantivos. Los adjeti-
1'
the old woman la anciana vos en inglés nunca cambian de forma. No tienen ni singular ni plural,
J
1

16 17
;¡¡1

1111¡,,
 ni son masculinos ni femeninos como en castellano. Estudie Ud. las 3. The woman is old. 7. The Mexican girls are
siguientes frases. Fíjese en la posición de los adjetivos red, big, little 4. The apples are red. little.
en las expresiones, así como también que no cambian de forma. Puesto 5. The girl is Mexican. 8. The house is big.
que el artículo the es adjetivo, tampoco sufre cambio. 6. The cars are old.
l. the big house la casa grande
2. the big houses las casas grandes EJERCICIO 5
3. the red car el coche rojo Traduzca las siguientes oraciones. Cámbielas al negativo, interrogativo e
4. the red cars los coches rojos Interrogativo negativo.
5. the little girl la muchacha pequeña
6. the little boys los muchachos pequeños l. The young man is big. 6. The small houses are old.
2. The new cars are red. 7. The American girls are young.
3. The little house is green. 8. The big desk is old.
EJERCICIO 2 4. The Mexican hoy is big. 9. The red apple is sweet.
Traduzca al inglés. Traduzca al castellano. 5. The American girl is little.
111:

l. el anciano l. The new car is red.

2. la manzana grande 2. The old car is green. EJERCICIO 6
3. los escritorios nuevos 3. Where are the little
Llene los espacios con is o are, según el caso, y traduzca.
4. eljoven girls?
5. el coche pequeño 4. The apple is sweet. l. The apples small. 6. The girls little.
6. el coche viejo 5. Where is the young 2. The girls Mexican. 7. lt red.
7. lajoven woman? 3. He ---~~ young. 8. They young girls.
1¡
8. el señor 6. Where are the small 4. The new cars --~-green. 9. The big cars red.
9. la señorita cars? 5. We _ _ _ American boys. 10. The Mexican man old.

EJERCICIO 3 EJERCICIO 7
Traduzca las siguientes oraciones. Cámbielas al negativo, interrogativo e Traduzca las siguientes oraciones y practique leyéndolas.
interrogativo negativo.
l. The boy is little. 13. Isn't the man American?
l. He's young. 5. You're Mexican. 2. The boy isn't little. 14. Where's the man?
2. It's new. 6. We're little. 3. Is the boy little? 15. The big house is new.
3. She's old. 7. I'm young. 4. lsn't the hoy little? 16. The big house isn't new.
4. They're big. 8. It's sweet. 5. Where's the boy? 17. ls the big house new?
6. The boys are young. 18. Isn't the big house
1
7. The boys aren't young. new?
1
EJERCICIO 4 8. Are the boys young? 19. lt's brown.
Traduzca las siguientes oraciones. Cámbielas al negativo, interrogativo e 9. Aren't the boys young? 20. It isn't brown.
interrogativo negativo. 1O. The man is American. 21. Is it brown?
! 11. The man isn't American. 22. Isn't it brown?
11111 l. The desk is brown. 2. The cars are new. 12. ls the man American?
1
1

18 19
i 1.1

', i 11

,lll!l![i
 EJERCICIO 8

~
Lea y traduzca estas oraciones.

l. The brown desk is new.

'i 2. The American girls aren't little.
i :,1' 3. Is the new car red?
' 4. No, the new car isn't red. lt's green.
5. Where is the little boy?
6. Isn't the young woman Mexican?
i' 7.
8.
Are the houses big? Yes, they're big.
They aren't little boys. They're young girls.
9. Where are the American girls?
10. Aren't the apples sweet?

'

EJERCICIO 9 'VJ®@rulbmil®L?L!® _ _,_,_ _

Escriba en inglés.
1

l. to go ir 13. telephone teléfono

1

l. ¿Es Ud. mexicano? 2. to come venir; llegar phone teléfono

2. No, no soy mexicano. Soy americano. 3. to work trabajar 14. office oficina
3. Los muchachos son jóvenes. 4. a, an un, una 15. school escuela
5. and y, e
1

4. Las muchachas grandes no son mexicanas. 16. movie película

11
1 1: 5. Las casas son rojas. 6. to a 17. father padre, papá
1

6. ¿Dónde está el muchacho pequeño? 7. in en, dentro de 18. mother madre, mamá
7. ¿No es rojo el coche nuevo? 8. with con 19. brother hermano
8. Sí, el coche nuevo es rojo. 9. my mi, mis 20. sister hermana
9. ¿Dónde están las muchachas americanas? 10. too también 21. Spanish español
10. El no es viejo. Es joven. 11. here acá, aquí 22. teacher profesor
12. table mesa

MODISMOS

l. Mr. Hunt el Sr. Hunt

2. Mrs. Hunt la Sra. Hunt
llli¡: ,1¡ 3. Miss Hunt la Srita. Hunt
J'¡ 4. Mr. and Mrs. Hunt los Sres. Hunt
(Mr., Mrs., Miss se emplean solamente con los apellidos.
i 1 El artículo no se usa con estas palabras.)
:1 S. He goes to the movies. El va al cine.
6. every day todos los días
1

7. Thank you. Gracias.

¡: 8. You're welcome. De nada, Por nada.

20 21
 ---
1 11

EJERCICIO 1 They're little boys. Son muchachitos.

Traduzca las siguientes oraciones y practique leyéndolas. We're teachers. Somos profesores.
They're big cars. Son coches grandes.
l. l'm in the office. 9. She's Mexican.
2. Am 1 in the office? 10. She isn't Mexican.
1'
3. I'm not in the office. 11. My father is here. EJERCICIO 3
4. Am 1 not in the office? 12. My father isn't here. Traduzca al inglés.
5. He's my brother. 13. ls Mary here?
6. The boy is American. 14. lsn't Mary here? l. •Es coche grande.
7. John isn't American. 15. Where is Mary? 2. ¿Es casa chica?
1'
8. ls John American? 16. She's here. 3. Ella no es muchacha joven.
4. ¿Es escuela grande?
~
1

11
5. Soy profesor.
LOS ARTÍCULOS A y AN 6. Somos profesores.
7. Es coche nuevo.
El artículo a se emplea antes de palabras que empiezan con sonido 8. ¿No es muchacho chico?
de consonante. El artículo an se emplea antes de palabras que empiezan 9. No son muchachos chicos.
con sonido de vocal. Ejemplos: an American girl, an office, a boy, a 10. Es padre.
Mexicanman
1

EJERCICIO 4
EJERCICIO 2 Traduzca las siguientes oraciones. Cámbielas al negativo, interrogativo e
'!' Llene los espacios con a o an y traduzca. Interrogativo negativo.

l. _ _ _ bigdesk 5. new office l. A young girl is here.

2. _ _ _ red apple 6. office 2. She's a young girl.
3. _ _ _ Mexican woman 7. old car 3. John is an American boy.
4. _ _ _ American woman 8. young boy 4. An American boy is here.
5. Mr. Green is a young man.
6. Mr. Smith is an old man.
LOS COMPLEMENTOS 7. He's a Mexican boy.
CON EL ARTÍCULO INDEFINIDO 8. An apple is red.
9. A big table is in the house.
En inglés, los complementos en singular que se pueden contar llevan 10. An American woman is in the office.
el artículo indefmido antes del sustantivo. Los complementos en plural
no van precedidos de artículo indefinido.
EL TIEMPO PRESENTE
He's a little boy. El es muchachito.
I'm a teacher. Soy profesor. Para conjugar cualquier verbo en el afirmativo del presente (menos
It's a big car. Es coche grande. loa dos verbos be y have), se quita la partícula to del infinitivo y se
pero: It's water. (No se Es agua. antepone el pronombre.
puede contar agua.)
,,j!
,11

22 23
!1,:

1\l¡¡ltl
mlffi'j
1 1::1'111
-
' 1 ~ 1 '

illltl,,,¡i
1

Con los pronombres de la tercera persona del singular, o sea he, she, 13. John and 1 go to school.
it, y con un sustantivo usado en singular como hoy, girl, house siempre 14. Mrs. Hunt and 1 go to school.
se añade unas al verbo. 15. John and Mary go to school.
Este tiempo se usa para representar acción habitual o un estado o 16. The boys go to school.
un hecho. 17. The girls go to school too.
18. My brothers go to school too.
1 come (yo) vengo we come (nosotros) venimos
you come (tú) vienes you come (Uds.) vienen
you come (Ud.) viene they come (ellos) vienen E.ERCICI06
he comes (él) viene they come (ellas) vienen Práctica Verbal Repita el ejercicio 5, usando formas de los verbos come
. 1! she comes (ella) viene they come (cosas) vienen (to school) y work (in an office).
i' 1!
l it comes (cosa) viene
l !1

LAS PREPOSICIONES TO y IN
1111 TO THE TEACHER
La preposición to (a) se usa después de verbos que indican movi-
The exercises in each lesson marked Práctica Verbal are to be used as
miento.
a verb conjugation study. Each exercise of this type will consist of a La preposición in (en, dentro de) quiere decir dentro de cierto lugar.
i group of short sentences that will serve as a model for all the verb Estudie las siguientes frases: to school, to the office, to the movies,
!111
tenses and constructions with which the students have become familiar. in the office, in the house, in school.
1 1
The sentences should be 1) translated into Spanish so the student
i
will know exactly what he is repeating in English; 2) read in English
11'
one at a time by the teacher with emphasis placed on pronunciation EJERCICIO 7
and repeated in chorus by the students; 3) read in chorus by the stu-
Llene los espacios con la preposición correcta y traduzca.
dents until they have mastered the verb tenses, construction, and word
order. l. John goes (a) school.
2. Robert is (en) the house.
EJERCICIO 5 3. The table is (en) the office.
4. My mother goes (a) the office.
l 1
Práctica Verbal

l. 1 go to school.
S.
6.
John comes (a)
Mary is (en)
the office with Mr. Brown.
school.
2. You go to school. 7. The boys are (en) the car.
3. He goes to school. 8. My sister is (en) the house.
'1: 4. She goes to school. 9. My brother goes (a) the movies every day.
5. J ohn goes to school. 10. My brothers are (en) ____ the office.
6. We go to school.
7. You go to school.
8. They go to school. EJERCICIO 8
9. Robert goes to school. Lea y traduzca estas oraciones.
10. My sister goes to school.
11. Mr. Hunt goes to school. l. John and Robert go to school with Mary.
12. Miss Hunt goes to school. 2. He works in a big office.

24 25

1\11'1 1
 3. Mr. and Mrs. Hunt cometo the office. EJERCICIO 11
4. My mother works in the house.
Conversación Conteste cada pregunta en afirmativo y en negativo.
5. My sister works in the house too.
6. My father is American, and my mother is Mexican. l. Are you Mexican?
7. Are the apples sweet? 2. lsn't the boy here?
8. No, the desk isn't new. 3. Are the girls in the house?
9. Where are the American boys and girls? 4. Aren't the boys brothers?
10. The American girls are with my sister. 5. ls the boy little?
11. Isn't Robert with my sister too? 6' Is Robert an American?
12. Mary is a little girl, and John is a little boy. 7. Are the boys in the car?
8. Isn't the little boy Mexican?
9. Aren't the girls with John?
EJERCICIO 9 10. Are they sisters?
¡;
Escriba en inglés. 11. Are they brothers?
1
12. Is the man American?
l. Mi hermano pequeño va a la escuela. 13. Isn't Robert with Mr. Hunt?
2. Mi hermana va a la escuela todos los días. 14. Is Mary with Miss Hunt?
11111111 3. ¿Es Ud. mexicano? Sí, yo soy mexicano. 15. Is John a big boy?
4. ¿Están las muchachas con Roberto? No, están en la casa.
5. Juan está con mi mamá también.
llli'¡l 6. Mis hermanos no son pequeños. Son grandes.
l
1111 '1 7. Mis hermanos trabajan en una oficina, y mi padre trabaja en una
11:
oficina también.
1

1
1 1
8. ¿Dónde están los muchachos americanos?
9. La Srita. Davis no está en la escuela.
10. El Sr. Hunt va al cine. La Sra. Hunt va al cine también.

EJERCICIO 10
1
1 Dictado
1 111 1

l. Robert is here too.

2. My father comes to the office every day.
¡;11!111 3. My father and mother are here.
4. Where are the Mexican boys?
5. Aren't you Mexican? No, I'm American.
6. Miss Taylor works in a big office.
7. J ohn goes to school in a car.
8. We go to school too.
9. My sisters go to the movies every day.
1O. Is the man he re?

1
26 27
i 1'
1

'1, ~1 1
1¡¡1 ,: '
11,' ,111
ífl'lljf
1 H
1

1¡ ,,
EJERCICIO 1
Traduzca las siguientes oraciones y practique leyéndolas.

~ció11 ~
l. Where are you? 14. Aren't they Americans?
2. How are you? 15. Where's the car?
3. He's at home. 16. Where are the notebooks?
4. He isn't at home. 17. The boys go to school.
5. Is she at home? 18. The girls go to school too.
6.\ Isn't she at home? 19. Where is the telephone?
7. We're in school. 20. It's in the office.
8. We aren't in school. 21. Robert goes to school.
9. Is Mary in school? 22. My sister goes to school.
10. Isn't Mary in school? 23. They cometo school.
11. You're an American. 24. 1 come to school too.
12. You aren't an American. 25. Mr. Hunt works in an office.
13. Are they Americans?
,,111 "Y®05rolbrnil~lSL!®"
l. to read leer 13. bow many cuántos LAS PREPOSICIONES ON, A T, FROM
2. to say decir 14. good bueno
3. to write escribir 15. well bien La preposición on (en, sobre) indica estar sobre una superficie.
4. to use usar 16. book libro La preposición at (en) indica un lugar determinado.
5. to take llevar, tomar 17. notebook cuaderno La preposición from (de) indica procedencia u origen.
6. on en, sobre 18. pencil lápiz Estudie las siguientes frases: on tbe table, on tbe desk, on Reforma,
7. at en 19. pen pluma at the rnovies, at borne, at scbool, at 5 Reforma, frorn tbe office, frorn
8. frorn de 20. letter carta; letra borne, from scbool, from tbe rnovies.
9. this este, esta, esto 21. tbere is, tbere are hay
10. this one éste, ésta EJERCICIO 2
is tbere?, are tbere? ¿hay?
11. these estos, estas; 22. one (1), two (2), tbree (3), Llene los espacios con la preposición correcta y traduzca.
éstos, éstas four (4), five (5)
12. how cómo l. My father is (en) _______ home.
2. My little brothers are (en) ______ s~:hool.
3. My father works (en) ____ an office.
MODISMOS 4. My sister comes (de) _ _ _ school.
S. The letter is (sobre) ____ the table.
l. How are you? ¿Cómo está Ud.? 6. The pencil is (en) _____ the notebook.
2. Fine, tbank you. Bien, gracias. 7. John is (en) ____ the movies.
3. What's your name? ¿Cómo se llama? 8. 1 come (de) _ _ _ home.
:,¡'
;1:,: My name is Jobn. Me llamo Juan. 9. My sister goes (a) ____ school.
4. first name nombre de pila 10. This pen is (sobre) _____ the desk.
5. last narne apellido ll. 1 work (en) _ _ _ Insurgentes.
1' 6. He's at borne. Él está en casa. 12. 1work (en) ____ 4 Insurgentes.
!

28 29
:
l.

\\11111
i

' q; ''
'"~
1

! 1
EJERCICIO 3 5. There are three books he re.
6. How many books are there'?
Traduzca las siguientes oraciones. Cámbielas al negativo, interrogativo e 7. Therc aren't five notcbooks here.
interrogativo negativo.
1

8. Is thcrc a pencil on the desk?

il1,
l. The table is green. 6. My brothers are at school.
'1 2. My first name is John. 7. The girl is in the house. THIS, THIS ONE y THESE
3. My last name is Hunt. 8. Aman is in the office.
4. The woman is in the house. 9. A book is on the desk. ~e emplea el adjetivo this (este, esta) con sustantivo en singular y el
i
' ! 5. My father is in the office. 1O. My sisters are at the movies. pronombre this one (éste, ésta) al referirse a un sustantivo ya mencio-
nado o sobreentendido.
La palabra these (estos, estas; éstos, éstas) se emplea, tanto en inglés
: 1
HAY- THERE IS{THERE'S) y THERE ARE como en \:astellano, con o sin sustantivo.
1

1 This book is red and this one is green.

Hay equivale a there is (there's) y there are. There is (there's) es Este libro es rojo y éste es verde.
singular y there are es plural. Is there y are there son las formas interro-
i i 1

gativas. There isn't y there aren't son las formas negativas. These books are red and these are green.
Estos libros son rojos y éstos son verdes.

1~1 ,1 EJERCICIO 4
EJERCICIO 6
i
Llene los espacios con there is(there's) o there are, is there o are there,
1

there isn't o there aren'ty traduzca. Llene los espacios con this, this one (singular) o these (plural) y tra-
duzca.
1
'1
,'

'
1

l. _____ an apple on the desk.

2. ____ two boys with my brothers. l. _______ manis my father.
3. How many girls in the house? 2. _____ boys are m y brothers.
4. __ ___ _an American woman he re. 3. _________ girls go to school.
5. ______ (negativo) two green pencils. 4. _______ boys use book. 1 use _______ too.
1

6. How many green pencils ? 5. girl isn 't my sister.

1: 1111¡'1
7. How many green pens _____ on the table? 6. _ pencil is red, and _______ is green.
1

¡) 1
8.
9.
______ (negativo) a telephone in the office.
_ ---· __ four red pencils and five green pens.
7.
8.
John takes ________ red books to school. 1 take ..
1 use ________ pencils in the office.
'''1
'1 10. _______ three boys and two girls. 9. __ boys are good. _______ isn't.
1

10. ___ woman reads ________ good books.

111 il
EJERCICIO 5
EJERCICIO 7
Traduzca las siguientes oraciones y practique leyéndoles.
Práctica Verbal
l. There's a boy here.
2. There isn't a boy here. l. 1 read a book. 4. J ohn rcads a letter.
3. ls there a girl he re? 2. You read a book. 5. Thc boy reads too.
4. lsn't therc a girl here? 3. He reads a book. 6. Miss IILrnt reads too.

' 1
30 31
!''
11!!

l,,,
 7. Robert reads too. 14. This girl reads too. 9. ¿Hay dos cartas sobre la mesa?
8. He reads at home. 15. These boys read. 10. Mi apellido es Johnson.
9. She reads at home. 16. These boys read too.
10. They read at home. 17. Mr. and Mrs. Hunt read.
11. I read in school. 18. Miss Taylor reads too. EJERCICIO 11
12. John reads in school. 19. John and Robert read.
Dictado
,1
13. This boy reads. 20. My brother reads too.
'1,
,ji
l. "How are you?" says Mary.
2~ "Fine, thank you," say John and Robert.
EJERCICIO 8 3. There aren't four boys in the house.
4. How many telephones are there in the office'?
Práctica Verbal Repita el ejercicio 7, usando las formas de los verbos 5. This boy takes a book to school.
write (a letter}, say (this}, use (a notebook}, take (this book). 6. These girls go to school in a car.
7. How many girls work in the office?
8. My name is Robert Brown.
11111 EJERCICIO 9
9. Isn't there a pencil in this notebook?
Lea y traduzca estas oraciones. 10. Aren't there three notebooks on the desk?

111¡111 l. There are 'five boys and four girls in this school.
2. Robert takés two books to school. EJERCICIO 12
3. Sara is my first name. My last name is Taylor.
4. Mrs. Taylor says, "How are you?" Conversación Conteste las siguientes preguntas.
'1111!: 5. How many letters are there on this table?
¡!!, 6. There aren't two notebooks here. l. How are you?
¡ ¡i
¡;11 7. There isn't a telephone in the office. 2. What's your name?
8. Aren't there boys in this school? 3. How many pencils are there on the desk?
¡¡:!
9. "Thank you," says John. "You're welcome," say Robert and Mary. 4. How many phones are there in the office?
10. We use books and pencils at school, and they use pencils and pcns Conteste las siguiente preguntas en afirmativo y negativo.
at the office.
il!¡li 5. Is there a notebook on the desk?
6. Aren't there Mexican boys here?
EJERCICIO 10 7. Aren't there girls in school?
Escriba en inglés. ~. 8. Aren't there desks in the office?
9. Is there an American boy here?
l. Este señor lee un buen libro. 10. Are there American girls here?
2. ¿Cuántos cuadernos hay sobre el escritorio? 11. Are you from Mexico?
3. Yo llevo mi libro a la escuela todos los días. 12. Are the girls at home?
4. Estas muchachas usan cuadernos, lápices y plumas en la oficina. 13. Is this book red?
5. Me llamo Henry Brown. 14. ls this one green?
6. ¿Cómo está Ud.? Bien, gracias. 15. Are these cars American?
7. Hay una señorita americana aquí.
8. Hay tres teléfonos en la oficina.
,,¡·
ij'¡·
i¡ 32 33
li
1 '1

1
1ill, ';1
.11
 ióll ~
7. He can read, write, etc. Él sabe leer, escribir, etc.
8. all the boys, girls, books, etc. todos los muchachos, muchachas,
libros, etc.

EJERCICIO 1
Traduzca las siguientes oraciones y practique leyéndolas.

1\ There's a girl here. 13. 1 use this one.

2. There isn't a hoy here. 14. He uses that one.
3. Are there many cars? 15. He says this.
1111111 4. How many cars are there? 16. He says that.
5. Is there a telephone here? 17. Mr. Martin says y es.
6. No, there isn't. 18. Mrs. Martin says no.
111 '\/®@®ThJDDlJ®LPlJ® - -
7. Aren 't there ten letters? 19. 1 write every da y.
l. to live vivir 14. that one ése, ésa; aquél, 8. No, there are eight. 20. He writes every day too.
2. to eat comer aquélla 9. How many notebooks are there? 21. He reads English.
3. to help ayudar 15. those esos, esas; aquellos, 10. There are five. 22. 1 read English too.
to bring traer aquellas; ésos, ésas; aquéllos. 11. You write many letters. 23. John reads English.
1 '1
5. to like gustar; simpatizar aquéllas 12. He uses a brown pen. 24. Mary reads English too.
'1
1' ¡;: 6. can poder 16. the United States
• ! ¡1.
7. candy (sing.) dulces (los) Estados Unidos
1 8. of de 17. street calle
111' 9. very muy 18. city ciudad LA PREPOSICIÓN OF
10. many muchos 19. park parque; jardín
11. sorne alguno(s) 20. dinner la comida principal La preposición of (de) indica parte de algo o pertenencia.
12. everything todo, todas 21. six ( 6), seven (7), eight (8). Estudie estas frases: sorne of the boys, rnany of the girls.
las cosas nine (9), ten (lO)
' t.hat ese, esa, eso; aquel,
113.
Lquella,aquello
EJERCICIO 2
Llene los espacios con la preposición correcta y traduzca.

l. I live (en) _____ 9 Harvey Street.

'11111'1 MODISMOS 2. 1 live (en) ______ a very big city.
1'
3. Alicegoes (a) theparkeveryday.
l. Here it is. Aquí está. 4. The boys go (a) ____ the movies.
2. It's very.big. Es muy grande. S. Sorne (de) ____ the boys live (en) ______ the dty.
3. It's very little. Es muy chico. 6. Many (de) _____ the girls live (en) ________ the United States.
4. There's room. Hay lugar. 7. Thesegirlslive (en) _________ mystreet.
There's no room. No hay lugar. 8. My brother works (en) _________ an office.
5. He's very nice. Él es muy simpático (agradable). 9. We bring the books (a) _______ school.
6. The car is very nice. El coche es muy bonito. 10. Everything is (en) _______ the table.
34 35
1 :

-
'.'
'1:!'
1
 1
' 1!

,:'11
1

,'i 11

EL VERBO LIKE EJERCICIO 3

11¡1111 Traduzca las siguientes oraciones y practique leyéndolas.
El verbo like se conjuga igual que todos los otros verbos. La forma
verbal que se usa después de éste será el infmitivo con la partícula to. l. 1 like to go to school. 14. Can't 1 go every day?
Estudie las siguientes oraciones: 2. You like to come too. 15. Where can I go?
1 like to help. Me gusta ayudar. 3. He likes to help. 16. You can help Alice.
You like toread. A ti te gusta leer. 4. She likes to help too. 17. You can't help Alice.
He likes to work. A él le gusta trabajar. S. WE; hke to wmk. 18. Can you help Alice?
John likes to work. A Juan le gusta trabajar. 6. ~ ou like to say that. 19. Can't you help Alice?
1t (animal) likes to eat. Le gusta comer. 7. They like to read. 20. He can eat apples.
,,,, 8. John likes the car.
We like to write. Nos gusta escribir. 21. He can't eat apples.
! You like candy. A Uds. les gustan los dulces. 9. My sister likes John. 22. Can he eat apples?
They Iike the movie. A ellos les gusta la película. 10. My mother likes candy. 23. How many apples can he
11. 1 can go every day.
1

11: My brothers like Mary. A mis hermanos les simpatiza María. eat?
1
12. 1 can't go every day. 24. Can't he eat apples every
1 111
EL AUXILIAR CAN 13. Can 1 go every day? day?
1

La palabra can es auxiliar. Un auxiliar es el que se usa con otro verbo

para formar tiempos o modos. La forma del verbo que se usa después de THAT, THAT ONE y THOSE
can siempre es el infinitivo sin la partícula to. En oraciones interroga-
tivas el auxiliar siempre se coloca antes del sustantivo o pronombre. La Se emplea el adjetivo that (ese, esa; aquel, aquella) con sustantivo en
negación del auxiliar can es can not. En conversación se usa la contrac- singular y el pronombre that one (ése, ésa; aquél, aquélla) al referirse a
ción can't. Por ser can un auxiliar, la tercera persona singular no ter- un sustantivo ya mencionado o sobreentendido.
1
li mina en s. Estudie las siguientes frases: La palabra those (esos, esas; aquellos, aquellas; ésos, ésas; aquéllos,
1 can go puedo ir aquéllas) se emplea en inglés, con o sin sustantivo.
1 can't go no puedo ir
,1 you can come puedes venir
you can't come no puedes venir That hoy is Mexican and that one is American.
he can help él puede ayudar Ese muchacho es mexicano y aquél es americano.
i ¡,

he can't help él no puede ayudar Those boys are Mexican and those art: American.
'1 Fíjese en la forma que se usa para construir el interrogativo o interro- Esos muchachos son mexicanos y aquéllos son americanos.
1
gativo negativo: auxiliar, sustantivo o pronombre, verbo.
11
EJERCICIO 4
1
Sustantivo o
Auxiliar Pronombre Verbo Llene los espacios con that, that one (singular) o those (plural) y tra-
duzca.
Can 1 come?
¿Puedo (yo) venir? l. girls live in 3. ______ man lives at 10
(Where) can the hoy go? Mexico. Grant Street.
¿{Dónde) puede el muchacho ir? 2. hoy lives in the 4. ____ girls aren't my
,¡
city. sisters. _ _ _ is.
Can't they help?
11', ¿No pueden ellos ayudar?
':ill'l
,::
l:¡l¡
1
36 37
1 i
1'

11
1

.1,1 l,
 ''''il 1

Í
1
.111

5. 1 like to help _ _ _ girl. 9. Can't you live on ____ _ EJERCICIO 7

r:l
6. You like _______ movie.
1

street?
'1 7. _ _ _ boys can help 10. He works in _ _ _ city. Práctica Verbal Repita el ejercicio 6, usando formas de los verbos eat
:1
Mrs. Grant. 11. _ _ _ books are (apples}, bring (candy), read (English}, help (/ohn), write (letters},
11' 1
8. Can you go to _______ _ red. ____ is green. say (good morning}, use (a phone), go (to the movies).
!l'¡i
11 park?
1

1 il 11

LOS ADJETIVOS POSESIVOS

EJERCICIO 8
1111! '
Lell\Y traduzca estas oraciones.
·11 1
Los adjetivos posesivos en inglés, como otros adjetivos, no son ni sin-
gulares ni plurales. Puesto que son adjetivos, se colocarán antes de los l. Her brother likes to live in the United States.
sustantivos. Aprenda lo siguiente. 2. Sorne ofthe boys go to the park.
3. There are many nice houses in that city.
my mi, mis her su, sus (de ella) 4. All the girls take their books to school.
your tu, tus its su (de una cosa) 5. Our last name is Miller.
your su, sus (de Ud. o de Uds.) our nuestro(s), nuestra(s) 6. How many pencils can you bring?
bis su, sus (de él) their su, sus (de ellos o de ellas) 7. Our sisters hclp our mother in the housc.
8. The girls eat dinner with their brothers.
9. We can't takc that book. It's very big.
EJERCICIO 5 10. There's no room in this car.
11. Her first name is Margarct. Iler last namc is Wells.
Llene los espacios con los adjetivos posesivos y traduzca. 12. He likes to go to thc office with his father.
13. one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten
l. Mother likes (su de ella) _______ new house.
14. 6 2 3 4 10 7 9 5 8 7 2 5 10 4
2. '1 bring (mi) _____ book.
3. Robert goes to school with (su de él) _____ brother.
4. They help (su de ellos) _ _ _ mother.
EJERCICIO 9
5. We take (nuestros) _____ pencils.
6. You read (su de Ud.) ____ book. Escriba en inglés.
7. John reads (sus de él) _____ )etters.
8. 1 eat (mis) _______ candy. l. No hay lugar en su (de ellos) casa.
9. Father likes (su de él) ______ o)d car. 2. Hay un parque en esta ciudad. Es muy grande.
10. John and Robert go with (su de ellos) mother. 3. A mis hermanos y a mí nos gustan los dulces.
4. Me llamo Pedro. Mi apellido es Daniels.
5. Él lleva a todos sus pequeños hermanos a la ciudad.
EJERCICIO 6 6. ¿Dónde está el teléfono? Aquí está.
7. ¿Puede Ud. venir a mi casa con Alicia?
Práctica Verbal Amplt'e las siguientes formas hasta incluir todas las per- 8. A ellos les gusta todo en esa ciudad.
sonas. 9. No podemos leer este libro. Podemos leer aquél.
10. ¿No puedes escribir con este lápiz?
l. I live in Mexico. 4. 1 can't live in Mexico.
2. 1 like to live in Mexico. 5. Can llive in Mexico?
3. I can live in Mexico. 6. Can't 1 live in Mexico?
': ¡
• 1

1
1

1
38 39
1

,¡

,.
1

·.,~1 .
1
¡

11 '1.1''1
:
r~ ~
1 1

,ll,'l'l EJERCICIO 10
! '11'
Dictado

-Leccittll rn
:,11
1 i! 1

: 1! l. We like to go to the movies with our brothers.

,11'¡, 2. They live in a nice house in Mexico City.
1

3. Our last name is Peterson.

4. Is there room in his house?
l!f 5. All those girls can take their notebooks to school.
,1 6. Can you read all these letters?
,¡,: 7. Father likes to take the boys to school.
8. Her brother lives in that house.
9. My father likes everything.
10. We like to go to the movies with John.
¡1
,¡11

'1111
EJERCICIO 11
1
'Y®@aJLbDDilaJ!S~® · - ---"-·--~·~··¡
··1111 Conversación Conteste las siguientes preguntas en afirmativo y nega- l. to put poner, meter 11. now ahora
tivo.
111,,111
2. to wash lavar(se) 12. what qué; lo que
l. Is there room in the car? 3. to wait (for) esperar 13. early temprano
il'¡ 2. Can you take your book to school? 4. to study estudiar 14. late tarde
·,1''1¡
1

3. Can you use this notebook? 5. to leam aprender 15. family familia
. !i '¡ 4. Is John in the street? 6. that que 16. parents padres
5. Are your brothers in the United States? 7. but pero, sino 17. child niño, niña; hijo, hija
6. Is Mexico City big? 8. when cuándo 18. children niños, niñas; hijos'
11111¡11111:1 7. Is that one little? 9. why por qué 19. garage garaje; taller
8. Are those cities small? 10. because porque 20. factory fábrica
9. Aren't the boys here?
'l:,ill.l'·¡ 10. Can you read?
!ll' 11. Can't Alice write? MODISMOS
'1¡1 12. Can Mary and Alice cometo my house?
i¡!l 13. Can all the boys go? l. Wait forme. Espéreme Ud.
14. Are all the boys in the house? 2. 1 like it. (refiriéndose a una cosa) Me gusta.
15. Is everything here? 3. what time a qué hora
4. too + (adj. o adv.) = demasiado + (adj. o adv.)
too big, (late) demasido grande, (tarde)
5. too much (work) demasiado (trabajo)
too many (books) demasiados (libros)
6. a lot mucho, muchos
a lot of work mucho trabajo
·'1 a lot of books muchos libros
111! (Se emplea of sólo cuando sigue un sustantivo.)
11
40 41
~
11

1 '.il¡
[1 .. ¡[11

~ ~
r-~1i 1 7. my muoh muoho
~
111!1 8. Wbat are you waitin~ for? ¿Qué esperas? EJERCICIO 3
1 9. He's eating dinner. El está comiendo. (la comida principal) Llene los espacios con la forma correcta del adjetivo posesivo y tra-
duzca.
EJERCICIO 1 l. (sus de ellos) ____ children are very little.
~
1;¡¡
!i 1
Traduzca las siguientes oraciones y practique leyéndolas. 2.
3.
Mr. Jackson washes (su de él) ____ new car.
(su de ella) _____ brother waits for Mary in the street.
1
l. He brings candy every day. 4. (mi) _____ father puts the car in the garage.
: 1

2. That man likes to bring books. 5.' (nuestros) ____ children like to study English.
3. That man can bring Mary. 6. Can't (su de Ud.) ____ child learn to write?
4. That man can't bring Mary. 7. (su de él) brother lives in the United S tates.
5. We bring the children too. 8. Mrs. Martin takes (sus de ella) children to the
6. Mr. Jackson and 1 bring a lot of apples. par k every da y.
,, 1111¡
7. Mr. Jackson and llike to bring a lot of apples. 9. "This is (mi) _____ pen," says Miss Jackson.
8. Mr. Jackson and 1 can bring a lot of apples. 10. (nuestro) ____ last name is Margan.
111 9. Mr. Jackson and 1 can't bring a lot of apples.
1:1

1,1,
10. She eats very much.
'1 ,,, 11. That girllikes to read everything. LA PALABRA HOME
¡,,11.·¡1 12. That girl can eat a lo t.
¡¡1
13. That girl can't eat a lot. borne a casa from borne de casa
1!
' 1 14. They come late every day. at borne en casa
15. They like to come late every day.
1

: ' . '¡1.'
16. They can come late every day. He comes home every da y. Él viene a casa todos los días.
1111
17. They can't come late every day. He goes home early. Él va a casa temprano.
He's at home. Él está en casa.
'l,l'¡l!i,
He works at home. Él trabaja en casa.
EJERCICIO 2 Él trae sus libros de casa.
1 He brings his books from home.
1:1! 11

Llene los espacios con this, this one, these, that, that one, those y tra-
duzca.
' ,l'ii¡l¡ EJERCICIO 4
l. When can (ese) ____ boy come early?
Traduzca al inglés.

~,
! ¡!
2. (esta) ____ family waits for all the children.
3. (esos) ______ parents wait for their children. l. Mi papá viene a casa.
4. Why can't (esa) ____ girl work here? 2. Los niños van a casa temprano.
t
i 1
5. John likes to wash (ese) _ _ _ new car, and Henry likes . ,t'i.
3. Venimos de casa.
to wash (éste) ___ _ 4. Me gusta comer en casa.
6. (estos) _ _ _ children like to go to school. ,,: 5. Su papá (de ella) trabaja en casa.
7. Where can 1 put (estas) tables? ''"(;
6. Mis padres no pueden ir a casa.
8. Why can't you take (este) child and (aquél) _____ ? 7. ¿Está en casa tu hermano?
9. My f:nher likes (esta) house, but rny mother likes 8. Ella puede traer muchos de casa.
(ésa) . ___ ..
9. ¿Puedo ir a casa?
10. Mother says that (esa) house is too little. 10. ¿Por qué no puedes ir a casa?
42 43

1
 EL GERUNDIO Negativo

El gerundio de los verbos se forma agregando ing al infinitivo, su- I'm not working now. No estoy trabajando ahora.
primiendo la partícula to. Going, working, reading, saying son gerun- You aren't reading. Tú no estás leyendo.
dios con la terminación ing. En castellano esta terminación corresponde She isn't working now. Ella no está trabajando ahora.
a los sufijos ando y iendo.
Fíjese en el orden de las palabras del interrogativo. Al hacer pregun-
4
going yendo reading leyendo tas en inglés, siempre se usa el auxiliar antes del sustantivo o pronombre.
working trabajando saying diciendo En el caso del presente progresivo se usará como auxiliar las formas del
verbo be.
Si el infinitivo termina en e se suprime la e antes de agregar ing.
Ejemplos: come, coming; write. writing; ust', using. Excepciones: being.
seeing \viendo). Interrogativo
Verbos monosi1abos que terminan en una sola consonante, prece- Sustantivo o
1 :11 dida de una sola vocal, duplicarán la consonante final antes de agregar Auxiliar Pronombre Verbo
ing. Ejemplo: put, putting.
1 l'i Are they writing?
1 11
EJERCICIO 5 ¿Están ellos escribiendo?
Dé el gerundio de los siguientes verbos. (Why) are the boys writing?
11 !¡ji¡l¡ ¿(Por qué) están los muchachos escribiendo?
l. be 1O. live
11
. !llllil 2. go 11. eat Interrogativo Negativo
3. come 12. help
1'¡:¡11¡11
4. work 13. bring Sustantivo o
·11
5. read 14. put Auxiliar Pronombre Verbo
1 ,:'lllill 6. write 15. wash
7. use Isn't he studying?
16. wait (for) ¿No está él estudiando?
ll¡l'l:ll 8. take 17. study
9. say 18. leam (Why) isn't John studying?
¿(Por qué) no está Juan estudiando?
EL TIEMPO PRESENTE PROGRESIVO Aren't the girls studying?
¿No están las muchachas estudiando?
1
Las formas del presente del verbo be son am, is, are. El presente pro- 41

1
1
' . gresivo se forma con el presente del verbo be (que se usa en este caso EJERCICIO 6
i!. como auxiliar) y el gerundio. . Traduzca las siguientes frases. Cámbielas al negativo, interrogativo e
111 Este tiempo se usa para describir una acción que está aconteciendo Interrogativo negativo.
''1' en el momento actual. Compare las formas en inglés y en castellano. ~
1.,
l. I'm taking 6. Mary is washing
il!l Afirmativo
1
2. you're living 7. we're working
I'm studying. Estoy estudiando. 3. he's putting 8. they're reading
He's working. El está trabajando. 4. Robert is leaming 9. the boys are using
You'rc reading. Tú estás leyendo. 5. she's studying 10. he's eating candy

44 45
1,,

¡:¡!¡l
·1
'1

il' ~1 1 1 !il
1
1
 Ji't'i.'

EJERCICIO 7
i 111
8. Where can he wait for Peter?
!1! i
Práctica Verbal 9. At what time can he wait for Peter?
10. Why can't he wait for Peter?
l. He's working now. 11. He's waiting for you.
5. Where is he working?
2. He isn't working now. 6. Why is he working? 12. He isn't waiting for you.
,11
3. Is he working now? 13. Is he waiting for you?
1 7. Why isn 't he working?
4. lsn't he working now? 14. Isn't he waiting for you?
8. At what time is he working?
1
' 11
1
15. Where is he waiting for you?
. 1' 111 EJERCICIO 8 16. Why is be waiting for you?
1 17. Why isn't he waiting for you?
1 '11
Práctica Verbal Repita el e}e,rcicio 7, usando formas de los verbos say 18. What is he waiting for?
1!!1111
(thank you), read (a letter}, write (a book), use (the phone), take (his
family}, live (in the United States}, eat (an apple), help (their father),
bring (my notebook). Use un pronombre o sustantivo distinto con EJERCICIO 11
1
cada verbo. Use las palabras interrogativas what, where, when, why, Práctica Verbal Repita el ejercicio 10, usando formas de los verbos
why not, what time, how many cuando sea posible.
study (a lot}, learn (English), wash (the car), read (a book), put (the
notebook here}, go (home), come (home}, eat {at home}. Use un pro-
EJERCICIO 9 nombre o sustantivo distinto con cada verbo. Use las palabras interro-
Llene los espacios con la forma correcta del verbo y traduzca. gativas what, where, when, why, why not, what time, how many cuando
sea posible.
l. (put) My brother is the car in the garage.
2. (work) That girl is in our house.
3. (wait for) We're Mr. Smith. EJERCICIO 12
4. (live) Are you in Mexico City? Lea estas oraciones y traduzca.
5. (study) What is Robert ?
6. (study) He's English. l. Bill is studying English, but he says he isn't learning very much.
7. (learn) Why are you English? 2. Grace is studying English too, and she likes it a lot.
8. (work) Why aren't you in the factory? 3. What are you waiting for? I'm waiting for my brother.
1
9. (go) Why are all the boys home? 4. Mother says that she likes her house because it isn't too big.
'1 ,¡1 10. (wash) Why is John the car? S. J ohn studies Spanish be cause he likes it.
1 6. The children wash the car, and John puts the car in the garage.
11
EJERCICIO 10 7. My parents go to work very early, and they come home very late.
lll¡;¡il !1
1

Práctica Verbal 8. What time can you wait forme?

1
11 1·'1 1
1 9. Wait forme at home.
1 1
l. He waits for Mary every day. 10. These children like to come home late.
···'1
¡¡'
111'
,1
2. He likes to wait for Mary. 11. Why can't you come to my house with your sister?
1

' 1
3. He can wait for Peter. 12. Mr. Miller can't work in the factory because he's very old.
1
4. He can't wait for Peter. 13. What's your name? My first name is George and my last name is
1
1
5. Can he wait for Peter? Parks.
1!1'
!11
6. Can't he wait for Peter?
7. When can he wait for Pe ter?

46 47
 -
1 EJERCICIO 13 7. Can't you learn everything?
Escriba en inglés. 8. ls that child Mexican?
9. ls that one American?
,,1
l. ¿Por qué estás trabajando en una fábrica? 10. Are those children from this school?
:1 2. Roberto está metiendo todo en el garaje. 11. Are these from that school?
'l! 3. ¿A dónde vas ahora? Voy a la escuela. 12. Aren't you putting the car in the garage?
111
,,1 4. ¿Por qué no están ellos viviendo en los Estados Unidos? 13. ls John coming?
¡,,' 1
5. A Alicia le gusta estudiar inglés. 14. Are you waiting forme?
'
1111
;1 ¡ 6. ¿Cuántos libros puedes leer? Puedo leer éste y aquél. 15. ls that roan waiting for you?
!11
1'
7. ¿Qué esperas? Estoy esperando a los niños. 16. Are you working in a factory now?
:1
8.
1

1
1
1
A ellos les gusta mucho el inglés. 17. ls he working in a factory?
'lllil!l 9. ¿Hay lugar en este coche y en aquél? 18. Are you going to the factory?
10. ¿Puedes ayudar a tus hermanos? 19. ls the car too big?
1111
11. El está comiendo muchos dulces. 20. Isn't the house too big?
21. Are there too many?
1
22. Are there too many cars?
EJERCICIO 14 23. ls there too much candy?
Dictado 24. Are thcre too many children?
25. ls there too much room?
l. My parents are going to the office, and I'm going to school.
2. These children like toread their books.
3. Are the children using the phone?
4. He can't write because there isn't a pencil.
'!lf 5. Wait forme because I'm going with you.
1 ¡,'11 6. What can 1 take with meto the park?
1
111
7. How many books are the children using?
' 111

11'11', 8. Why are you using my pencil?

9. Why aren't the boys helping their parents?
ljl,illllll 10. What are you saying?
:11]11''
¡'' 1

EJERCICIO 15
' 1

1.'11'
11 il
Conversación Conteste las siguientes preguntas en afirmativo y nega-
,1:1
tivo.

l. Can you read?

'1
11,,,'
2. Can John read?
1

¡i¡:
1!
3. Can you come early?
! 1' 4. Can't they wash the car?
5. Can my brother wait for you?
'11
6. Can all the boys go home?
11,1
1

,111
48 49
11

li~I~JI,,
~
 7. so +(adj. o adv.) = tan + (adj. o adv.)
so big, (late) tan grande, (tarde)
8. so much (work) tanto (trabajo)
so many (books) tantos (libros)

EJERCICIO 1
Traduzca las siguientes oraciones y practique leyéndolas.

l. We put the car in the 8. They aren't washing

garage. everything.
2. We like to put the car 9. Are they washing
in the garage. everything?
3. We can put the car in 10. lt's working now.
11. ls it working now?
"Y®@rul])mDrurrti®-------~------. the garage.
4. We can't put the car in 12. Isn 't it working now?
l. to get up levantarse 11. please por favor the garage. 13. Why isn't it working?
2. to wake up despertarse 12. minute minuto 5. Can we put the car in 14. There's too much room.
~r 3.
4.
to visit visitar
to teach enseñar
13.
14.
hour hora
husband esposo
the garage?
6. Can't we put the car in
15. ls there too much room?
16. How much room is
5. to see ver 15 .wife esposa the garage? there?
6. for para, por wives esposas 17. There isn't too much
7. They're washing

t
7. so así es que; para que; 16. year año everything. room.
por lo tanto 17. tomorrow mañana
8. student alumno, estudiante 18. eleven (11), twelve (12),
9. how much cuánto thirteen (13), fourteen (14), :r.~
LA PREPOSICIÓN FOR
10. who quién fifteen ( 15)
Se emplea la preposición for en inglés para expresar duración de
tiempo.
MODISMOS Muchas veces no se emplea el equivalente de for en castellano porque
queda sobreentendido en la oración. (
1, i
1. they say dicen He studies for ten minutes.
2. to be early llegar temprano El estudia diez minutos.
I'm early. Uego temprano; llegué temprano (acabando de llegar)
3. to be late llegar tarde 1 can work for two hours.
I'm late. Uego tarde; estoy retrasado, he llegado tarde; se me está Puedo trabajar dos horas.
haciendo tarde; llegué tarde (acabando de llegar) We can live in Acapulco for ayear.
4. in the morning en o por la mañana Podemos vivir en Acapulco por un año.
5. justa minute please un momento, por favor
6. It's very early. Es muy temprano.
lt's very late. Es muy tarde.

50 51
 '1' '

EJERCICIO 2 EL FUTURO IDIOMÁTICO

Llene los espacios con la preposición correcta y traduzca.
El futuro idiomático es una manera idiomática para expresar tiempo
l. 1 can read an hour. en el futuro. El castellano también tiene un futuro idiomático, y la
2. All the students are studying (en) school. formación de los dos es muy parecida. Se necesitan tres cosas para for-
3. Are you waiting your husband? mar este tiempo en inglés: el presente del verbo be (am, is, are), la pala-
11.!
,,
4. Sorne (de) my brothers teach English. bra going y un infinitivo.
5. Who lives (en) 1O Grant Street? Compare el inglés con el castellano. Fíjese en el presente del verbo
6. There are two cars (en) _ _ _ our garage. be, la palabra going y un infinitivo en ese orden.
7. How many notebooks are there (en) the desk?
8. Who studies fifteen minutes? Afmnativo
9. Charles works two hours.
10. Can you go to the United States ayear? I'm going to work tomorrow. Voy a trabajar mañana.
He's going to get up early. El va a levantarse temprano.
They're going to visit Van a visitar a sus padres.
EJERCICIO 3
their parents.

Llene los espacios con la forma correcta del verbo be y traduzca. Negativo
1. you living in Mexico now? I'm not going to work. No voy a trabajar.
2. The child waking up. He isn't going to get up El no va a levantarse
3. George working with his father. early. temprano.
4. Mrs. Brown waiting for her husband. We aren't going to teach No vamos a enseñar inglés.
5. We putting everything in the house. English.
6.
7.
8.
9.
That man
Why
Why
Who
teaching Spanish.
you getting up so early?
these girls studying?
using the phone?
' Interrogativo
Fíjese en el orden de las palabras en el interrogativo. Siempre se co-
10. What you eating? loca el auxiliar antes del sustantivo o pronombre. En el futuro idiomá-
tico el auxiliar es siempre una forma del verbo be.
EJERCICIO 4
Sustantivo o
Traduzca las siguientes oraciones. Cámbielas al negativo, interrogativo e Auxiliar Pronombre Verbo
interrogativo negativo. .
ls he going to get up?
l. My husband is getting up. 6. That boy is using the phone. ¿Va él a levantarse?
2. Miss Taylor is teaching 7. The students are eating a lo t. Are they going to visit?
English. ¿Van ellos a visitar?
3. The children are waking up. 8. That girl is washing. (Where) am 1 going to work?
4. Charles is visiting his brother. 9. I'm helping. ¿(Dónde) voy (yo) a trabajar?
5. We're learning English 10. He's waiting for his
'i now. brother.

52 53
i
1

'1
,.,
 :','1 Interrogativo Negativo Sustantivo o tantivo distinto con cada verbo. Use las palabras interrogativas why,
Auxiliar Pronombre why not, what, where, when, how many, how much, at what time
Verbo
cuando sea posible.
1¡1' Isn't he going to work?
!¡,'
¿No va él a trabajar? EJERCICIO 8
,· 11'1
Aren't they going to visit? Llene los espacios con el infinitivo entre paréntesis y traduzca.
,111¡'
¿No van ellos a visitar? My brother is going the car in the
1

,11 l. (to put)

¡! ¿(Why) aren't they going to teach? garage.
i ¿(Por qué) no van ellos a enseñar? That girl is going in our house.
2. (to work)
3. (to wait for) We're going Mr. Smith.
4. (to live) Are you going in Mexico City?
1
EJERCICIO 5 What's Robert going ?
11111,11
S. (to study)
Traduzca las siguientes oraciones. Cámbielas al negativo, interrogativo e 6. (to see) He's going the new house.
llrrl interrogativo negativo. 7. (to learn) Why are you going English?
8. (to work) Why aren 't you going in the
111¡
l. I'm going to work. 7. They're going to wake up. garage?
2. You're going to eat. 8. That hoy is going to read. 9. (to go) Where are all the boys going _ _ _ ?
3. He's going to help. 9. This girl is going to go. 10. (to be) Why is John going a teacher?
4. She's going to wash. 10. These children are going
1

S. We're going to study. to come.

6. You're going to teach. EjERCICIO 9
Llene los espacios con el auxiliar correcto de las formas del verbo be y
EJERCICIO 6 traduzca.
Práctica Verbal l. Charles going to bring a lot.
2. That girl ____ going to wake up early.
l. We're going to take everything.
2. We aren't going to take everything. 3. We going to visit Mr. Smith.
3. Are we going to take everything? 4. The teacher going to get up.
S. _ _ _ you going to teach in Mexico City?
1
4.
S.
Aren't we going to take everything?
Why aren't we going to take everything? 6. What Robert going to study? .
,,'1,!! 6. When are we going to take everything? 7. They going to see everything.
·1

7. Where are we going to take everything? 8. Why you going to learn English?
1' i 8. What time are we going to take everything? 9. Where the boys going to go?
'1•
9. Why are we going to take everything? 10. Why Alice going to be a teacher?
) ,1

'!'
EJERCICIO 7 EJERCICIO 10
,'11! 1
Práctica Verbal Repita el ejercicio 6, usando las formas de los verbos Práctica Verbal
1,
see (my wife), be (at home), like (that house), wait (for Robert), come
(home), bring (a lot), wash (the children). Use un pronombre o sus- l. They get up early. 2. They like to get up early.
li¡'
··¡11
11¡

''1
54 55
¡·!
1

..
1 ' ' ~ 1

l '111

l
' '1
1 Ji !1¡:,:
r1 ,:i:lllll
1¡;

,::
J¡·

¡¡1:
1
1

3. They can get up early. 15. They're going to get

r-
!
~ 2. Alicia dice que le gusta levantarse temprano.
~111 3. Voy a ver quién está en casa.
1
: 4. They can't get up early. up late.
1 5. Can they get up early? 16. They aren't going to 4. ¿A qué hora vas a trabajar?
1
11
6. Can't they get up early? get up late. 5. Estamos visitando a nuestros padres en los Estados Unidos.
¡;, , 7. Why can't they get up early? 17. Are they going to get 6. Me gustan todos estos (this) dulces.
1'1 8. What time can they get up? up late? 7. ¿Cuántos profesores hay en la escuela?
1

· ¡! 9. They're getting up now. 18. Aren't they going to 8. ¿Viene un coche ahora?
·1 !1 10. They aren't getting up now. get up late? 9. Ella llega tarde porque se despierta tarde.
1. 11. Are they getting up now? 19. Why are they going to 10. ¿Quién va a despertar a Bill en la mañana?
i 12. Aren't they getting up now? get up late?
:j l'i 13. Why are they getting up now? 20. Why aren't they going
'·¡· !1 14. Why aren't they getting to get up late? EJERCICIO 14
up now? Dictado
1
~"
,~ ~ ~ !i EJERCICIO 11
l.
2.
He says that he likes to teach English.
Is your brother going to be a teacher?
1
1¡· Práctica Verbal Repita el ejercicio 10, usando formas de los verbos 3. When are you going to learn English?
: teach {English), wake up {ear!y), visit (their parents), work (in a fac- 4. Why are you getting up so early?
tory), study (Spanish), see (the teachers}. Use un pronombre o sustan- 5. Why are they going to come home so late?
1
'¡1 . . 1
tivo distinto con cada verbo. Use las palabras interrogativas why, why 6. Why are the children going to school so early?
,'] ·11. not, what, where, when, what time, how many cuando sea posible. 7. There are fifteen boys and girls in that school.
8. I'm waiting for the teacher.
l:i ~-:(1
EJERCICIO 12 9. She can't come so early.
1
10. one, six, twelve, fifteen, eleven, seven, thirteen, three, eight, four-
' 11:1 1 Lea y traduzca estas oraciones y números. teen, four, nine, five, ten, eleven, twelve.
1' l. They say that that young man is a very good English teacher.
il'l
2. I'm waiting for my wife, but she's late.
'•1 3. What time are you going to work in the moming? EJERCICIO 15
4. They say that they aren't going to visit their parents tomorrow. Conversación Conteste las siguientes preguntas.
1· 1
5. Just a minute please. I'm going to help you.
'·il¡l:.
,, 1
6. Charles is visiting his teacher who lives in the United States. l. How many teachers are there in the school?
1,1 7. Why are you getting up so early? 2. How many boys are there in the school?
,¡
8. I'm late this morning. 3. How many girls are there in the school?
'1 .¡' 9. His sister eats a lot of candy. 4. How many children are there in the street?
'}1 1'
10. twelve, fifteen, ten, eleven, eight, fourteen, thirteen, seven, six, 5. Where are you going?
¡¡' three, nine, five, two, one, four, eleven 6. Where is your brother going?
1 ~ :
7. Where is your sister going?
1 ,.

'1

'1
EJERCICIO 13 Conteste las siguientes preguntas en afirmativo y en negativo.
Escriba en inglés. 8. Can you wait for me in the morning?
9. Are yo u early?
l. ¿Qué vas a llevar? Voy a llevar todo.

56 57

..
ji1 1

I~JI:' 1;1

~
 '
. ,. rn
10. Are you going to get up early?
11. Isn't she going to be a teacher?
12. Aren't you visiting your brother in Mexico City?
13. Can't they come early in the moming?
14. Is Henry going to eat here?
15.
16.
Isn 't he taking everything?
Is this one too big?
___,,.~Cittll
17. Is that one too small?
18. Are you going to wake up early in the moming?
19. Aren't we going to work tomorrow?
11!1., 20. Can you see me now?
21. Is the school too little?
,111
22. Are there too many phones?

1~
23. Is there too much work?
24. Is there a lot ofwork?
25. Is there a lot?

\'/®@mlbmlJffi[Pn®
l. to speak hablar 13. there allí, allá
2. to walk caminar, ir a pie 14. cousin primo(a)
3. to ron correr 15. grandmother abuela
4. to feel sentir(se) 16. grandfather abuelo
5. to want querer 17. grandparents abuelos
,11111 6. by por 18. garden jardín
7. before antes de (que) 19. yard patio; espacio
'
8. after después de (que) alrededor de una casa
1

9. sick enfermo, mal 20. sixteen (16), seventeen (17),

111
10. weak débil eighteen (18), nineteen (19),
11. happy feliz, contento twenty (20), twenty -one (21 ),
1 ¡111 12. sad triste twenty-two (22)
- __ ,. . . .,_,___ ..
~- ·--"'"''---'-N-~~,-

'1:1

MODISMOS
' 1' 1
1
\

1 '

l. I'm sorry. Lo siento; Siento que ...

2. Excuse me, Pardon me. Con permiso, Dispénseme.
3. that's why por eso
l. 4. surely, certainly con mucho gusto
,¡¡
li¡l. 5. There 's going to be work. Va a haber trabajo.
6. There are going to be children. Va a haber niños.
58 59

.L ,1:
...,
 .11111

1.¡11'
11

'!1
1 ..

,i' EJERCICIO 1 La preposición by se emplea en inglés después de verbos de movi-

l 1

Traduzca las siguientes oraciones y practique leyéndolas. miento con la idea de pasar por o pasar frente a.
1!!!¡
!ll l. John and Mary visit their cousin. Can you come by my house thls afternoon?
2. John and Mary like to visit their cousin. ¿Puede Ud. pasar por mi casa esta tarde?
1

1 1
3. John and Mary can visit their cousin. She walks by my house when she goes to school.
4. John and Mary can't visit their cousin. Ella pasa frente a mi casa cuando va a la escuela.
5. John and Mary are going to see that movie.
6. John and Mary aren't going to see that movie. EJERCICIO 2
7. John and Mary are getting u p. Llene los espacios con la preposición correcta y traduzca.
8. John and Mary aren't getting up.
9. Are John and Mary getting up? l. We visit our grandparents Monday, Wednesday, and Fri-
10. Aren't John and Mary getting up? day.
11. My grandparents are going to wake up. 2. Mr. Johnson goes (frente a) the school when he goes to
12. My grandparents aren't going to wake up. work.
13. Are my grandparents going to wake up? 3. Father eats (antes de que) ____ he goes to the office.
14. Aren't my grandparents going to wake up? 4. 1 get up (después de que) he goes to the office.
15. When are m y grandparents going to wake up? 5. 1 go home (después de) school.
16. Why are my grandparents going to wake up? 6. They help their mother (antes de que) they study.
17. What time are m y grandparents going to wake up? 7. We go to the park ____ Sunday.
18. Mr. Jackson can teach everything. 8. John comes (por) ____ my house before he goes to school.
19. Mr. Jackson can't teach well. 9. Can you come to see me Monday?
20. Can Mr. Jackson teach well? 10. Where are you going to be Thursday?
11. He walks (frente a) the office.
LOS DÍAS DE LA SEMANA 12. They like to walk (en) the park every day.
13. Why are you walking (en) the park?
Aprenda los d/as de la semana. Note Ud. que se escriben con mayúscula. 14. Many (de) the boys are going to come Friday.
15. ls John going to visit hls grandmother ____ Tuesday?
Monday lunes Friday viernes
Tuesday martes Saturday sábado
Wednesday miércoles Sunday domingo LA FORMA POSES IV A
Thursday jueves
La forma posesiva de un sustantivo que se refiere a una persona o a
un animal se forma agregando un apóstrofo y una s. Esta forma pose-
EL USO DE LAS PREPOSICIONES ON y BY siva siempre va antes del sustantivo poseído. En el caso de los sustanti-
1' :'
vos que terminan en s, basta añadir el apóstrofo después de las.
En general se usa la preposición on antes de los días de la semana.
the boy's book el libro del muchacho
My father works on Sunday. los libros de los muchachos
the boys' books
Mi papá trabaja el domingo. the child's pencil el lápiz del niño
Are you going to come on Tuesday? the children's pencil el lápiz de los niños
¿Vas a venir el martes? John's pen la pluma de Juan
:1

60 61
1 ¡1'

.....
' '1

l, ¡H i''
11 ,,,,
1

-
 Charles' house
Mr. White's car
his father's
la casa de Carlos
el coche del Sr. White
el (los) de su padre (de el)
' 1 want to go.
Quiero ir.
He wants to speak to John.
They want to go.
Ellos quieren ir.
We want to visit our cousins.
i
11 Él quiere hablarle a Juan. Queremos visitar a nuestros
·.1¡,
EJERCICIO 3 >:!
primos.
J'
1
Traduzca las siguientes frases al inglés. :r
EJERCICIO 5
1. el libro de la muchacha 9. el coche de mi padre Traduzca las siguientes oraciones y practique leyéndolas.
2. el libro de las muchachas 10. el primo de Juan
3. la mamá de los niños 11. la casa de la señora l. He wants to be a teacher.
4. la casa de la Sra. Martin 12. la de tu hermano 2. You want to go to the movies.
S. la esposa del Sr. J ackson 13. los de mi profesor 3. He wants to work in a factory.
6. el hermano de María 14. la de Juan 4. She wants toread that book.
7. el hermano de los muchachos 5. We want to write sorne letters.
8. los hermanos de los 6. They want to use their English.
muchachos 7. Robert wants to come early.
8. Stella wants to get up early.
EJERCICIO 4
9. The boys want to work in the yard.

Llene los espacios con la forma posesiva del sustantivo indicado.

EJERCICIO 6

~
l. (grandfather) We're going to my house.
2. (cousin) Your car is in our garage. Práctica Verbal
3. (sister) Where is her husband?
4. (Mrs. Jackson) Isn't husband here? l. We speak English.
5. (boys) The notebooks are on the desk. 2. We like to speak English.
6. (Charles) Henry is going with brother. 3. We want to speak English.
7. (Mr. Martin) That woman is wife. 4. We can speak English.
1 8. ( children) How many of the books can S. We can't speak English.
·¡111
you bring? 6. Can we speak English?
1111' 9. (girls) The grandmother is sick. 7. Can't we speak English?
10. (brother) My wife says that she feels weak. 8. We're speaking English.
11. (wife) This is your book. 9. We aren't speaking English.
12. (father) Those are my _ __ 10. Are we speaking English?
li'll¡! 11. Aren't we speaking English?
12. We're going to speak English.
1

; ' 11!
1

EL VERBO WANT 13. We aren't going to speak English.

1111!
.. 11

14. Are we going to speak English?

'·i'.
La forma verbal que se usa después del verbo want es el infinitivo 15. Aren't we going to speak English?
con la partícula to. Compare con el español. Estudie las siguientes ora-
.¡i ciones:
11.
·'1' .
1''
1,·1 62 63
l¡

i
i\ ,¡
'¡1,1;
',, ':
1.1·

,.,
 EJERCICIO 7
7. Voy a hablar inglés.
Práctica Verbal Repita el ejercicio 6, usando las formas de los verbos 8. La niña de la Sra. Johnson está triste porque está enferma.
run (in the yard), walk (home), feel (sad). Use un pronombre o sustan- 9. Los padres de mi esposo están muy contentos porque viven en la
tivo distinto con cada verbo. Use las palabras interrogativas why, why ciudad.
not, what, where, when, how many, how much, what time cuando sea ~' 10. ¿Por qué corres ahora?
posible. \: 11. Quiero ser profesor.
~'
ji
EJERCICIO 8 \ EJERCICIO 10
Lea y traduzca las siguientes oraciones y números. \· Dictado

l. I want to go to the office this morning and see his cousin's sister. l. I'm not going to speak English. I'm going to speak Spanish.
2. William says that after he works in the yard he likes to eat. 2. Henry's cousin is early, but his brother is late.
3. Are you going to visit your grandmother on Saturday before you 3. He wants to go to the movies with me.
go to the office'! 4. I'm sick. 1 can't work.
4. Are you going by your brother's house when you go to work on 5. J ohn says that everything is new.
lucsday? 6. What's your brother's name?
1 5. 1 feel weak after 1 work all morning. 7. That boy's name is Bill.
6. The children's grandmother wants to bring a Iot of apples. 8. My grandparents are very old, but they're very happy.
. llli 9. Why aren't the children happy?
1
·1111: .' 11 7. Fifteen of the twenty boys in that school are studying Spanish.
11111·1 8. The children can run in the yard, but they can't run in the house. 10. eight, five, eleven, thirteen, twelve, twenty, twenty-nine, nine-
',1.11.!11!11.11!
9. Alice says that she likes to walk to school. teen, eighteen, twenty-six, twenty-three
'111111 10. We aren't going to be late on Monday.
1'¡11:1111¡11111 11. My grandfather's house isn't very big, but it's very nice.
lj·llli!llll 12. Isn't your cousin living with your grandfather and grandmother EJERCICIO 11
1111
11. now? Conversación Conteste las siguientes preguntas en afirmativo y negativo.
11111111111

111
11·¡ J 1 1.; !.111

·. ll;!lljllll
~ i11:1
13. sixteen, nineteen, twenty, eighteen, seventeen, fourteen, fifteen,
thirteen, six, four, three, seven, eleven, twdve l. Can you come on Monday?
14. one, two, thre.::, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten 2. Can your father come on Saturday?
:"ll jl l/¡1: 3. Can you come by the house this afternoon?
1
.1 11111111¡
4. Can 1 use John's notebook?
1
EJERCICIO 9 5. ls he using his brother's book?
lllllli¡lll
1

11 Escriba en inglés. 6. ls he going to use his sister's pencil?

.· 'l'
. 11111,1111'
7. ls he going to walk to school?
1"',11:1,111
l. Lo siento, pero no puedo hablar inglés. 8. ls the boy running?
,
1 1
11 111;,:
1
2. Dispénseme, por favor. Me siento mal. 9. Is his cousin going to the factory now?
¡,·!¡1,1¡'/ 3. Ella dice que su hermana habla mucho. 10. Is he coming now?
,.,,,¡111.! 4. Mi abuela no puede correr. Por eso llega tarde. 11. Is John's book red?
1111

.,.11'1' 5. Vamos a levantarnos temprano el miércoles porque vamos a la es- 12. ls this one your father's?
1111 cuela. 13. Isn't that one your brother's?
fl 1

14. Are those Mary's?

!111¡1 6. Mi nombre no está en el libro de Juan. Está en el de María.
i'.'lll¡llllll!
1 1
11111 11"
64 65
llljllljlllll

' ',,llil¡ll:
11'1!

J
'11
1
' 11111¡11

,. l,l!,ll·li iJ
,., ~
 15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Is there going to be a lot of work?
Is there going to be a lot?
Are there going to be a lot of children?
Are there going to be a lot?
Are the boys running too much?
• ~ m
Clttll (!J
20. Are you going to eat a lot of candy?
21. Are they going to want a lot?
22. Is she going to be a teacher?
23. Aren't the girls going to wake up?
24. Are we going to be late?
25. Are you going to be early?

¡1

~®@mwmDffi~n® _________
l.
2.
3.
to do hacer
to understand entender
to sit (down) sentarse
12.
13.
14.
window ventana
living room sala
chair silla
l
4. to know saber, conocer 15. sofa sofá
5. to open abrir 16. floor piso
6. around alrededor de 17. rug alfombra
7. slow despacio, lento 18. homework tarea (de
slowly lentamente escuela)
8. fast rápido, aprisa 19. thirty (30), thirty-one (31).
9. wall pared thirty-two (32), forty (40).
10. fence cerca, barda fifty (50), sixty (60),
11. door puerta seventy (70)
...-------·----- ..·----

·MODISMOS

l. Please sit down. Por favor, siéntese.

2. He's sitting (down). Él está sentado.
3. What time is it? ¿Qué hora es?
4. It's five (o'clock). Son las cinco.
5. It's five-thirty. Son las cinco y media.
6. It's five-fifteen. Son las cinco y cuarto.
7. It's a quarter after five. Son las cinco y cuarto.
8. It's twenty (minutes) to five. Faltan veinte para las cinco.

66 67

i 1

~
 9. It's a quarter to five. Falta un cuarto para las cinco.
LOS AUXILIARES DO Y DOES
10. It's ten (minutes) after five. Son las cinco y diez.
11. At five (o 'clock). A las cinco.
Do y does se usan como auxiliares en preguntas y negaciones con
todos los verbos menos con las formas del verbo be y otros auxiliares
como can. En el tiempo presente la forma do se usa para todas las per-
EJERCICIO 1
sonas menos para la tercera persona del singular, y para ésta se usa does.
Traduzca las siguientes oraciones y practique leyéndolas. Cuando se usa el auxiliar does, el verbo principal no llevas como termi-
nación de la tercera persona singular del presente, porque después de
l. Mrs. Carter wants to get up. un auxiliar en inglés se usa el infinitivo sin la partícula to.
2. Mrs. Carter is going to want to get up. La contracción negativa de do not es la palabra don't, y la contrac-
3. Mrs. Carter isn't going to want to get up. ción negativa de does notes la palabra doesn't.
1 1
4. Is Mrs. Carter going to want to get up?
5. lsn't Mrs. Carter going to want to get up? Afirmativo
6. What time is Mrs. Carter going to want to get up?
7. Miss Bell wants to speak Spanish. 1 want quiero
8. Miss Belllikes to speak Spanish. you want quieres
9. Miss Bell is speaking Spanish. you want Ud. quiere
10. Miss Bell isn't speaking Spanish . he wants él quiere
11. Is Miss Bell speaking Spanish? she wants ella quiere
12. Isn't Miss Bell speaking Spanish? it wants quiere
.,1 111
we want queremos
13. Why isn't Miss Bell speaking Spanish?
14. Mr. Curtis runs fast. you want Uds. quieren
15. Mr. Curtis Ji kes to run fas t. they want ellos quieren
16. Mr. Curtis can run fast. they want ellas quieren
17. Can Mr. Curtis run fast?
18. Can't Mr. Curtis run fast? Negativo
19. Why can't Mr. Curtis run fast? no quiero
1 don't want
20. When can Mr. Curtis run fast? you don't want no quieres
ll:!i you don't want Ud. no quiere
,,11: he doesn't want él no quiere
l
!il ella no quiere
EL PRESENTE DEL VERBO DO she doesn't want
it doesn't want no quiere
Las formas del verbo do significan hacer cuando se usa como verbo we don't want no queremos
principal. En el presente de este verbo la forma do se usa para todas las you don't want Uds. no quieren
personas menos para la tercera persona singular, y para ésta se usa does. they don't want ellos no quieren
11
Ejemplos: they don't want ellas no quieren

I do the work. He does the work. Interrogativo

Yo hago el trabajo. Él hace el trabajo.
Recuerde el orden de las palabras del interrogativo: auxiliar, sustan-
tivo o pronombre, verbo.

68 69

¡¡
''·'·1
¡,
1
J¡
~ ,..,
 do 1 want? ¿quiero?
do you want? ¿quieres? EJERCICIO 4
do you want? ¿quiere Ud.? Llene los espacios con do y does y traduzca.
',1
' ,, ' does he want? ¿quiere él?
does she want? ¿quiere ella? l. 1 speak a lot of Spanish. (negativo)
1 ¡i ~ 2. you speak English? (interrogativo)
does it want? ¿quiere?
do we want? ¿queremos? 3. he speak English? (interrogativo negativo)
do you want? ¿quieren Uds.? 4. your brother get up early? (interrogativo)
1
do they want? ¿quieren ellos? S. That girl study. (negativo)
do they want? ¿quieren ellas? 6. Mrs. Carter like to teach. (negativo)
7. we like to run in the garden? (interrogativo)
Interrogativo Negativo 8. They want to go. (negativo)
9. My sister want to run. (negativo)
don't I want? ¿no quiero? 10. _ _ _ John like to walk? (interrogativo negativo)
don't you want? ¿no quieres?
don't you want? ¿no quiere Ud.?
doesn't he want? ¿no quiere él? EJERCICIO S
doesn't she want? ¿no quiere ella? Traduzca estas oraciones. Cámbielas al negativo, interrogativo e inte·
doesn't it want? ¿no quiere?
11 don't we want? ¿no queremos? rrogativo negativo.
' 1:
1

1 '1.1
don't you want? ¿no quieren Uds.? l. You know that man. 6. You speak Spanish.
111,
don't they want? ¿no quieren ellos? 2. He works here. 7. John lives in Mexico.
11' don't they want? ¿no quieren ellas? 3. 1 open the door. 8. They read the book.
·1'
11 ¡'il
·11
4. She sits in a chair. 9. Mrs. Carter uses a pencil.
5. We understand a lot of 10. That boy goes to school.
EJERCICIO 2 English.
Práctica Verbal

l. He lives here. 5. Where does he live? EL IMPERATIVO

2. He doesn 't live he re
3. Does he live here?
4. Doesn't he live here?
1
6. Why does he live here?
7. Why doesn't he live here? La forma imperativa de la segunda persona singular you (tú, Ud.) y
de la segunda persona plural you (Uds.) se construye con el infinitivo
menos la partícula to. No se expresa ningún pronombre. Para el nega-
tivo se coloca el auxiliar don't antes del infinitivo sin la partícula to.

EJERCICIO 3 Estudie lo siguiente:

1 '!11:
i' 11
Práctica Verbal Repita el ejercicio l, usando formas de los verbos say Corre. Corra. Corran.
(qood afternoon}, take (his books), bring (her cousin}, study (a lot), Ron.
Don't ron. No corras. No corra. No corran.
go (every doy), work (fast), get up (late), speak (English), walk (home). Vaya. Vayan.
Go. Vete.
Use un pronombre o sustantivo distinto con cada verbo. Use las pala- No te vayas. No vaya. No vayan.
bras interrogativas what, where, when, how many, how much, why, Don't go.
Eat. Come. Coma. Coman.
why not, what time cuando sea posible. No coma. No coman.
Don't eat. No comas.
1

',ii¡
'

70 71
111

' ')
1'
1

1 ,¡'' 1,111
~' li!'
 EJERCICIO 6 EJERCICIO 9
Práctica Verbal Práctica Verbal Repita el ejercicio 8, usando formas de los verbos sit
(here), open (the window), know (everything), understand (Spanish).
l. Come here. (Ven.)
',, Use un pronombre o sustantivo distinto con cada verbo.
'¡¡ 2. Don't come here. (No vengas.)
'1 3. Come here. (Venga.)
!,¡
4. Don't come here. (No venga.)
!
5. Come here. (Vengan.) EJERCICIO 10
j¡ 6. Don't come here. (No vengan.) Lea y traduzca estas oraciones y números.
,,'11
¡! l. She doesn't like to sit in that big chair in the living room.
EJERCICIO 7 2. There's a fence around our yard.
3. He's sitting on the sofa with Helen.
Práctica Verbal Repita el ejercicio 6, usando formas de los verbos help 4. When 1 open that window, 1 can see all the children in the yard.
(John), wait (for me), speak (fast), bring (the car), work (every day), 5. Charles is late because he doesn't like to get up early in the mom-
get up (earfy), read (that book), use {his telephone). ing.
6. Are they going to put the green rug on the living room floor?
EJERCICIO 8 7. I don't know why there are twenty -one doors in this house.
8. Where are yo u going at six -thirty?
Práctica Verbal 9. Please don 't speak so fast.
l. He does the homework. 10. The sofa is too big for the living room.
2. He doesn't do the homework. 11. My cousin says that he's going to come at ten-thirty.
3. Does he do the homework? 12. twenty-five, thirty-five, forty-five, fifty-five, sixty-five,
4. Doesn~ he do the homework? seventy-five, twenty-two, thirty-three, forty-four, sixty-six,
5. He likes to do the homework. seventy -seven.
6. He doesn't like todo the homework.
7. Does he like to do the homework? EJERCICIO 11
8. Doesn't he like todo the homework?
9. He's doing the homework. Escriba en inglés.
10. He isn't doing the homework. l. No me gusta esta película.
11. ls he doing the homework? 2. Puedo ver a todos los niños en el patio.
12. lsn't he doing the homework? 3. ¿Qué hora es? Son las dos y media.
13. He's going todo the homework. 4. Va a venir a las siete y veinticinco.
14. He isn't going todo the homework. 5. ¿Por qué no viene él temprano? Faltan diez minutos para las nueve.
15. Is he going todo the homework? 6. La pluma de esta muchacha no escribe bien.
16. Isn't he going todo the homework? 7. No te sientes en el piso. Siéntate en el sofá.
'1
17. He can do the homework. 8. No corras tan rápido. No vamos a llegar tarde.
18. He c?n't do the homework. 9. La señorita Harris no quiere lavar las puertas y las ventanas esta
19. Can he do the homework? mañana.
20. Can't he do the homework? 10. ¿Qué haces ahora? Hago mi tarea.
21. Do the homework.
i
1

22. Don't do the homework.

'!.
'!¡
1

•'
'1 ,:,
~
¡1,,,
11
72 73
11¡¡

11·

,l
1

J1
 EJERCICIO 12 21. Do you get up early?
22. Do you wake up at seven o'clock?
Dictado
23. Do you want to wait forme?
l. What time is it? 24. lsn't there going to be a movie?
¡'l 2. It's three-fifteen. 25. Aren't there going to be girls?
1
3. lt's twenty minutes to eight.
1
4. Do you speak English?
,1 5. No, I don't speak English, but 1 speak Spanish.
'11
:¡
6. Do you want to walk around the garden?
7. Please sit down on the so fa. 1 want to put the books in thís chaír.
¡,1¡: 1

8. I'm going to open the door.

9. How many windows and doors are tht:re in the living room?
' i
1'
10. twenty-seven, thirty-one, forty-nine, fifty-two, sixty-three,
seventy-six, twenty-eight, thirty-four, forty-seven, fifty-one
lli
1'
: il EJERCICIO 13
1

l Conversación Conteste las siguientes preguntas.

~
1'

l. What time is it?

1 11
2. Where do you live?
r., 3. Where does your brother live?
4. Where does your father work?
~
I1'1

5. What time do you go to the factory?

6. What time are you going to the factory?

r¡,,¡
11

'
11'
,11
1
7.
8.
9.
What time do you go home?
What time are you going home?
What are they eating?

~~
10. What's he going to bring?

Conteste los siguientes preguntas en afirmativo y en negativo.

;!l 11. ls it ten-fifteen?

:·':: 12. Do you live in Mexico City?

1
~~ 1,
13.
14.
Do you work in a factory?
Does your wife work in a factory?
¡:¡ 15. Does your husband work a lot?
1 '

16. Do you work in an office?

17. Does your sister speak a Jot of Englísh?
18. Do you know that man's name?
19. Do yo u know everythíng?
20. Do you like to study English?

74 75

~L
:¡1''
1'''
~~~1
..., ~
 ~~iÓII Tirn
9. It's (very) cold. Hace (mucho) frío, Está haciendo (mucho)frío.
It's (very) warm (hot). Hace (mucho) calor, Está haciendo
(mucho) calor.
10. l'm going to be twenty (years old). Voy a cumplir veinte (años).
11. I'm going to be hungry, thirsty, etc. Voy a tener hambre, sed, etc.
12. It's going to be cold, warm. Va a hacer frío, calor.

EJERCICIO 1
Traduzca las siguientes oraciones y practique leyéndolas.
l. John's cousin understands English.
2. John's cousin doesn't understand English.
3. Does John's cousin understand English?
4. How much English does John's cousin understand?
5. Doesn't John's cousin understand English?
\fGx~rolbrnDff1L?Ll® - . --.-· --~·- . , 6. Mary's father likes to sit here.
7. Mary's father doesn't like to sit he re.
l. to have tener, haber 13. daugbter hija
8. Does Mary's father 1ike to sit here?
2. to can Uamar 14. curtain cortina
9. Why does Mary's father like to sit here?
3. to tell decir, contar 15. day día
10. Doesn't Mary's father 1ike to sit here?
4. to tbink pensar, creer 16. week semana 11. Why doesn't Mary's father like to sit here?
5. to make hacer 17. month mes
12. This boy's sister knows a 1ot.
6. if si 18. eighty (80), eigbty-one (81),
13. This boy's sister doesn't know a lot.
·¡j, 7. near cerca (de) eighty-two (82), ninety (90),
1 l . 14. Does this boy's sister know a lot?
1:!, 8. clean limpio one hundred (lOO), two 15. Doesn't this boy's sister know a lot?
1

9. dirty sucio hundred (200), three bundred 16. That man's wife likes todo this.
10. white blanco and fifty (350), three hundred 17. That man 's wife doesn 't like to do this.
11 . bine azul and fifty-one (351), three 18. When does that man's wife like todo this?
son hijo hundred and fifty-two (352) 19. Doesn't that man's wife like todo this?
20. Henry's cousin is going to sit down.
21. ls Henry's cousin going to sit down?
MODISMOS 22. lsn't Henry's cousin going to sit down?
1
23. John's brother is opening the door.
l. How old are you? ¿Cuántos años tiene?
2. I'm twenty (years. old). Tengo veinte {años).
3. I'm (very) hungry. Tengo (mucha) hambre. LA PREPOSICIÓN A T CON TIEMPO Y LUGAR
4. l'm (very) thirsty. Tengo (mucha) sed.
5. I'm (very) cold. Tengo (mucho) frío. La preposición at se usa para indicar tiempo definido y lugar deter-
6. l'm (very) warm (hot). Tengo (mucho) calor. minado. Ejemplos:
1
.,
7. l'm (very) sleepy. Tengo (mucho) sueño. 1 eat at two o'clock. 1 live at 269 Madison Street.
1
8. l'm (very) afraid. Tengo (mucho) miedo. Yo como a las dos. Vivo en la calle de Madison 269.

76 77
1

1 .i

lt ¡,::1¡
 EJERCICIO 8. When are you going to your English lesson?
Llene los espacios con la preposición correcta y traduzca. 9. They cars in that factory.
10. How much work can you in a day?
l. We go to school (a) six-fifteen.
2. The sofa is (cerca de) the window.
3. Do you like to sit (en) the sofa? EL VERBO HA VE (TENER y HABER)
1

4. He's sitting (a) the table.

5. l'm going to sit (en) this chair. 1 have tengo it has tiene
6. The children like to sit (en) the floor. you have tienes we have tenemos
you have Ud. tiene you have Uds. tienen
7. I get up (a) seven o'clock in the moming.
8. Are you going (a) seven-twenty? he has él tiene they have ellos tienen
she has ella tiene they have ellas tienen
9. Mr. Carter goes to the office (a) nine-thirty.
lO. There are five students (alrededor de) the teacher's desk.
11. The garden is (cerca de) the house.
12. I go (frente a) your house when 1 go to school. EJERCICIO 4
Traduzca las siguientes oraciones y practique leyéndolas.

TODO y TO MAKE l. 1 have a son. 17. Doesn't it have a big yard?

2. 1 don't have a son.
Se traducen los infmitivos todo y to make por hacer, pero hay al- 3. Do 1 have a son?
guna diferencia en el uso de los dos. 4. Don't 1 have a son?
En general make se emplea para expresar una acción manual, mien- 5. What do 1 have?
tras do se emplea para expresar una acción mental o en oraciones donde 6. You have a daughter.
no se defme el tipo de acción. Estudie los ejemplos. 7. You don't have a daughter.
8. Do you have a daughter?
l. She's making curtains. (acción manual) 9. Don't you have a daughter?
2. He does the homework. (acción mental) 10. He has two sisters.
3. What are yo u doing? (tipo de acción no indicado) 11. He doesn't have two sisters.
4. 1 want two boys to do this work. (tipo de acción no indicado) 12. Does he have two sisters?
13. Doesn't he have two sisters?
18. Why does it have a big
yard?
19. We have our notebooks.
20. We don't have our
notebooks.
21. Do we have our notebooks?
22. Don't we have our
notebooks?
23. They have too much.
24. They don't have too much.
25. They're going to have
toomuch.

· ~1·
14. It has a big yard. 26. Are they going to have
EJERCICIO 3 15. It doesn't have a big toomuch?
l,¡, Llene los espacios con la forma correcta de los verbos do y make y tra- yard. 27. Aren't they going to
duzca. 16. Does it have a big yard? have too much?
·'1' 1

l. What do you on Sundays?

1 .il·'
,:' l
1

2. My father is going to a chair. EJERCICIOS

3. The girls want to sorne candy this aftemoon. Llene los espacios con have o has.
4. What's John in the street?
5. The students are their homework. l. We _ __ 4. He doesn't - - -
6. My mother is a rug. 2. We don't _ __ 5. John _ __
7. His cousin all the work. 3. He _ __ 6. John and Mary _ __
,,
.11
78 79
. 1.111

!Ji
 Do we have to go?
7. John and Mary 9. They _ __
¿Tenemos que ir?
don't _ __ 1O. Don't we ? have to study?
Do yo u
8. John doesn't _ __ 11. Doesn't Mary ? ¿Tienes que estudiar?
EJERCICIO 6 Interrogativo Negativo
1
Traduzca estas oraciones. Cámbielas al negativo, interrogativo e inte-
¡: !1 rrogativo negativo. Auxiliar Sustantivo o Pronombre Verbo
l.llil¡
1¡': Doesn't he have to work?
l. John has two brothers. 6. Mary and Bill have ¿No tiene que trabajar él?
2. Mr. Carter has two two pencils.
daughters. 7. The windows have white Don't we have to go'l
3. We have a lot,of candy. curtains. ¿No tenem0s que ir?
4. My cousin has a phone. 8. The children have parents. you have to study?
Don't
5. George's brother has 9. Virginia has a lo t. ¿No tienes que estudiar?
two books. 10. The room has a red rug.
11. This car has everything. EJERCICIO 7
Práctica Verbal
LA EXPRESIÓN IDIOMÁTICA DE NECESIDAD
l. He has to go.
La manera idiomática de expresar necesidad se forma con el verbo 2. He doesn't have to go.
have, seguido de un infmitivo con la partícula to. Equivale a tener que, 3. Does he have to go?
seguido de un infinitivo. Compare el inglés con el castellano. 4. Doesn't he have to go?
5. Where does he have to go?
Afirmativo 6. When does he have to go?
7. Why does he have to go?
1 have to go. Tengo que ir. 8. Why doesn't he have to go?
He has to work. Él tiene que trabajar. 9. At what time does he have to go?
They have to study. Ellos tienen que estudiar.

Negativo EJERCICIO 8
We don't have toread. No tenemos que leer. Práctica Verbal Repita el ejercicio 7, usando formas de los verbos
You don't have to wait. No tienes que esperar. work (late), speak (English), write {a letter), wake up {at eight), get up
1 don't have to come. No tengo que venir. (at seven), be (early), have (a phone), live (in the United States), study
(very much). Use un pronombre o sustantivo distinto con cada verbo.
Interrogativo Use las palabras interrogativas what, when, where, why, why not, how
Recuerde el orden de las palabras del interrogativo: auxiliar, sustan- many, how much, what time cuando sea posible.
¡il
' tivo o pronombre, verbo.

Auxiliar Sustantivo o Pronombre Verbo

have to work? Traduzca estas oraciones. Cámbielas al negativo, interrogativo e inte-
Does he
¿Tiene que trabajar él? r·woaativo negativo.
¡'11

,1111'1 80
81
. ti
J l¡¡l!!:

~~ ¡1,'111!
 l. Robert has to read his book.
2. All the children have to leam English. LA TRADUCCIÓN DE PARA
3. We have to get up early. ANTES DE UN INFINITIVO
4. You have to walk to the office.
5. Mary has to wait forme. No se puede usar en inglés la palabra for (para) antes de un infmitivo
6. Mr. Carter has to wash the car. como se usa en castellano.
7. The teacher has to teach English.
8. 1 have to use the phone. Ejemplo: Es demasiado tarde para comer.
9. We have to eat dinner. It's too late to eat.
10. That hoy has to wake up.
EJERCICIO 11
Traduzco los siguientes oraciones al inglés. No traduzco lo palabro para
LA TRADUCCIÓN DE LA PARTÍCULA antes de un infinitivo.
CASTELLANA A
l. Él tiene todo para hacer la mesa.
2. Él usa su lápiz para escribir.
La preposición a en castellano se usa entre el verbo y el comple- 3. Él es muy pequeño para ir a la escuela.
mento cuando el complemento es una persona o animal definido, pero 4. Es demasiado temprano para levantarse.
no cuando se trata de un objeto. 5. ¿Qué tiene Ud. para comer?
Él lava a su hermanito. He washes his little brother. 6. Ella va a estudiar para ser maestra.
lj'
1'!
,.¡1, Él lava al perro. He washes the dog. 7. Hace demasiado calor para trabajar.
~ i 1

Él lava el coche. He washes the car.

¡1,,
l!
REGLAS DE ORTOGRAFÍA
1 ll En el último ejemplo la preposición a no se usa entre el verbo lava y
Cuando un verbo termina en y, precedido por una consonante, se
el complemento coche porque coche no es ni persona ni animal. En in-
,:¡: cambia la y por i y se le agrega es para formar la tercera persona singu-
glés siempre se suprime esta preposición, cualquiera que sea el comple-
r 1

mento, persona, animal u objeto. lar. Ejemplo: He studies.

Los sustantivos terminados en y, precedidos por una consonante,
:¡ forman su plural cambiando la y por i y agregando la terminación es.
1:
!!,!: Ejemplos: city, cities country, countries family, families
EJERCICIO 10
Recuerde la regla que aprendió en la lección 6. Si el verbo termina en
Traduzco los siguientes oraciones al inglés. No traduzco lo preposición a. e, se suprime ésta antes de agregar ing. Ejemplos: give, giving come,
:¡¡:~ ..
1: 1 :
:,':11'

¡¡ coming
l. Yo conozco a este muchacho.
111
' ' 2. Las muchachas no ayudan mucho a su mamá. Verbos monosílabos que terminan en una sola consonante, prece-
3. Juan visita a su abuela. dida de una sola vocal, duplicarán la consonante final antes de agregar
4. Él no enseña a los niños. ing. Ejemplo: put, putting
5. Yo puedo ver a mis padres. Esta regla se aplicará también a los verbos polistlabos cuando la
6. Jorge está lavando el coche. última silaba lleva el acento. Ejemplos: begin (empezar), beginning
7. El maestro está ayudando a todos los niños. pero: open, opening (lleva el acento en la primera stlaba)
8. Vamos a visitar a nuestros primos.
9. Yo no voy a despertar a aquellos muchachos.
10. ¿Por qué no vas a llamar a esos muchachos? EJERCICIO 12
Fíjese en los siguientes palabras.

1
82 83
: '. 1, ¡~1 1
~
J
1 ¡ 1

1¡,1 '¡,
,, ,111
~
 '1 l. cities 9. living
2. countries 30. She can't call early.
10. liking
11

3. families 31. Can she call early?

11. getting up
4. studies 32. Can't she call early?
12. waking up
5. coming 13. seeing 33. Why can't she call early?
6. writing 14. putting
7. using 15. running EJERCICIO 14
8. taking 16. sitting {down)
Práctica Verbal Repita el ejercicio 73, usando formas de los verbos
tell (john), think (that), make (curtains). Use un pronombre o sustan-
1 EJERCICIO 13 tivo distinto con cada verbo. Use las palabras interrogativas when, why,
,11

Práctica Verbal why not cuando sea posible.

l. She calls early.

2. She doesn't call early. EJERCICIO 15
,¡
1
3. Does she call early? Lea y traduzca las siguientes oraciones y números.
1¡
4. Doesn't she call early?
,¡!¡1 5. Why does she call early? l. 1 have to wash the curtains beca use they're dirty.
,1
,,
6. When does she call early? 2. There are blue and white curtains on the windows, and there's a
7. She's going to call early. green rug on the floor.
8. She isn 't going to call early. 3. Mr. Carter's little daughter is going to the United States in a month
9. Is she going to call early? to study English.
10. Isn't she going to call early? 4. I'm going to sit near the window where it's warm.
11. Why is she going to call early? 5. I'm going to call the boys and see if they're running in the yard.
12. Why isn 't she going to call early? 6. Miss Davis says that she has to make curtains for all the windows in
13. She's calling early. her house.
14. She isn't calling early. 7. Do you think that you can make a rug?
15. Is she calling early? 8. He says he's forty-five years old.
16. Isn't she calling early? 9. lfyou're hungry, why don't you eat?
17. Why is she calling early? 10. The wall is very dirty, so don't sit near it.
18. Why isn't she calling early? 11. Don't tell me that you're going to Chicago for a month.
19. She likes to call early. 12. Do you know how many months have thirty-one days?
1
20. She doesn 't like to cal! early. 13. fifty, sixty, seventy, eighty, ninety, one hundred, one hundred and
21. Does she like to call early? ten, one hundred and twenty, two hundred
22. Doesn't she like to call early? 14. eighty-eight, nincty-nine, one hundred and twenty-two, one hun-
i ill
1 23. Why doesn't she like to call early? dred and thirty-three, one hundred and fifty, one hundred and
24. She wants to cal! early. fifty-five, one hundred and seventy-five
25. She doesn't want to call early.
26. Does she want to call early?
EJERCICIO 16
27. Doesn't she want to cal! early?
2ª. Why doesn't she want to call early? Escriba en inglés.
29. She can call early.
l. Abra Ud. las puertas y las ventanas.
84 85
 11. Do you have to get up at six?
2. No abras las cartas. 12. Do they have to study a lot?
3. Si no puede Ud. venir el lunes, venga el martes.
4. Hace mucho calor en la sala. Por eso estoy abriendo las ventanas.
5. Mi hija tiene que estudiar inglés porque ella quiere trabajar en los Conteste las siguientes preguntas en afirmativo y en negativo.
Estados Unidos.
6. Mi hijo tiene veintiún años, y por eso va a Estados Unidos para 13. Isshecold?
estudiar. 14. Is she going to be cold?
7. Llame a los niños. Creo que están en el patio. 15. Are you sleepy?
8. ¿Cuántos niños tiene Ud.? 16. Are you going to be sleepy?
9. Ella está haciendo muchas cortinas para usar en su casa. 17. Are they afraid?
10. Tengo que trabajar el domingo. 18. Are they going to be afraid?
19. ls John's sister hungry?
20. Is John's sister going to be hungry?
EJERCICIO 17
21. Is it cold?
Dictado 22. Is it going to be cold?
23. ls it hot?
l. Is it warm in Acapulco? 24. ls it going to be hot?
2. Yes, it's very warm there. 25. Is there going to be homework?
3. There are seven days in a week and thirty days in a month.
4. Sorne months have thirty-one days.
5. How many weeks are there in a month?
6. 1 have to go now.lt's three-fifteen.
7. lf you can't come on Friday, do you think you can come on Sat-
urday?
8. He doesn't have to work on Tuesday.
9. lfyou're cold, don't sit near the window.
10. Why are you sleepy?

EJERCICIO 18
Conversación Conteste las siguientes preguntas.
l. How old are you?
1'
2. How old is your brother?
1

'1
3. How old is your sister?
4. How old is your car?
5. How many brothers do you have?
6. How many sisters do you have?
7. How old are you going to be?
8. What are you doing?
9. What are you making?
10. Does he have to work on Saturday?

86 87

:1 1

11¡¡, ',,¡¡,

~
 ciitll TI~
next month el mes entrante
next year el año entrante
6. What's it made of! ¿De qué es?
What's the door made of! ¿De qué es la puerta?
It's made of wood, metal, glass, etc. Es de madera, metal,
cristal, etc.
7. 1 was hungry, thirsty, etc. Tenía hambre, sed, etc.
8. It was cold, warm. Hacía (hizo) frío, calor.

1'1

li EL TIEMPO PASADO DEL VERBO BE

1

!¡::
,, 1

' El pasado de am y de is es was, y el pasado de are es were. La con-

tracción en negativo de was not es la palabra wasn't, y la contracción
en negativo de were notes la palabra weren't.
\'J®@mlbmlJtDL?~® Afirmativo
l. to think about 10. uncle tío 1 was estuve, estaba, fui, era we were estuvimos
pensar en 11. aunt tía you were estuviste you were Uds. estuvieron
to think of 12. room cuarto you were Ud. estuvo they were ellos estuvieron
pensar en 13. dining room comedor he was él estuvo they were ellas estuvieron
2. to look (at) mirar; 14. vase florero she was ella estuvo
fijarse (en) 15. flower flor it was estuvo
3. to clean limpiar 16. money dinero
4. to talk hablar; platicar 17. time vez; tiempo Negativo
1 5. to finish acabar, tenninar 18. first(lst) primero we weren't no estuvimos
1 wasn't no estuve, no estaba,
6. next próximo second(2nd) segundo you weren't Uds. no estuvieron
no fui, no era
7. next to junto a third(3rd) tercero they weren't ellos no estuvieron
l,¡i
you weren't no estuviste
8. bad malo, mal fourth(4th) cuarto they weren't ellas no estuvieron
you weren't Ud. no estuvo
9. every cada fifth(Sth) quinto
¡111
he wasn't él no estuvo
~:¡ ~ ' she wasn't ella no estuvo
it wasn't no estuvo
MODISMOS
Interrogativo
,,1
l. 1 was ten (years old) in June. Cumplí diez años en junio. was 1? ¿estuve, estaba, fui, era? were we? ¿estuvimos?
2. over there para allá, hacia allá, por allá
r 3.
4.
over here para acá, hacia acá, por acá
every morning todas las mañanas
were you? ¿estuviste?
were you? ¿estuvo Ud.?
were you? ¿estuvieron Uds.?
were they? ¿estuvieron ellos?
was he? ¿estuvo él? were they? ¿estuvieron ellas?
every aftemoon todas las tardes
was she? ¿estuvo ella?
every night todas las noches
was it? ¿estuvo?
5. next week la semana entrante

88 89
1

1 il
1

·~~~
' ,1 11
¡ IJ!
 Interrogativo Negativo 6. You were on the so fa.

1
l. 1 was here.
wasn't 1? ¿no estuve, no estaba, weren't we? ¿no estuvimos? 2. You were at home. 7. They were near the chair.
no fui, no era? weren't you? ¿no estuvieron 3. He was in the yard. 8. John was in the garden.
weren't you? ¿no estuviste? Uds.? 4. She was in the living room. 9. Mary was in the house.
weren't you? ¿no estuvo Ud.? weren't they? ¿no estuvieron S. We were there. 10. John and Mary were there.
wasn't he? ¿no estuvo él? ellos?
wasn't she? ¿no estuvo ella? weren't they? ¿no estuvieron
wasn't it? ¿no estuvo? ellas? EJERCICI04
Traduzca las siguientes oraciones y practique leyéndolas.
1

J EJERCICIO 1 l. l'm hungry. 29. 1 was hungry.

'
¡''
1
Traduzca las siguientes oraciones y practique leyéndolas. 2. l'm not hungry. 30. 1 wasn't hungry.
1'11 3. Am 1 hungry? 31. Was 1 hungry?
il
l. 1 was sick. 18. We weren't happy. 4. Am 1 not hungry? 32. Wasn't 1 hungry?
2. 1 wasn't sick. 19. Were we happy? S. You're thirsty. 33. You were thirsty.
1
1'' 3. Was 1 sick? 20. Weren't we happy? 6. You aren't thirsty. 34. You weren't thirsty.
4. Wasn't 1 sick? 21. You were weak. 7. Are you thirsty? 35. Were you thirsty?
1 i!,
1!,
S. You were sad. 22. Yo u weren't weak. 8. Aren't you thirsty? 36. Weren't you thirsty?
1
6. You weren't sad. 23. Were you weak? 9. He's cold. 37. He was cold.
7. Were you sad? 24. Weren't you weak? 10. He isn't cold. 38. He wasn't cold.
,'!!1!' 8. Weren't you sad? 25. They were late. 11. Is he cold? 39. Was he cold?
',111
'f1 9. He was dirty. 26. They weren't late. 12. lsn't he cold? 40. Wasn't he cold?
',,! 10. He wasn't dirty. 27. Were they late? 13. She's warm. 41. She was warm.
11. Was he dirty? 28. Weren't they late? 14. She isn't warm. 42. She wasn't warm.
12. Wasn't he dirty? 29. lt was dirty. 15. Is she warm? 43. Was she warm?
13. She was clean. 30. She wasn't early. 16. lsn't she warm? 44. Wasn't she warm?
14. She wasn't clean. 31. We were early. 17. We're sleepy. 45. We were sleepy.
15. Was she clean? 32. It wasn't clean. 18. We aren't sleepy. 46. We weren't sleepy.
16. Wasn't she clean? 33. You weren't there. 19. Are we sleepy? 4 7. Were we sleepy?
17. We were happy. 34. Were they there? 20. Aren't we sleepy? 48. Weren't we sleepy?
21. You're afraid. 49. Yo u were afraid.
22. You aren't afraid. 50. You weren't afraid.
EJERCICIO 2 23. Are you afraid? 51. Were you afraid?
Práctica Verbal Repita el ejercicio 1, usando sustantivos distintos. 24. Aren't you afraid? 52. Weren't you afraid?
i
:'1 1
25. lt's warm. 53. It was cold.
54. It wasn't cold.
11 1

11
26. It isn't warm.
27. ls it warm? 55. Wasitcold?
EJERCICIO 3 28. lsn't it warm? 56. Wasn't it cold?
Traduzca las siguientes oraciones. Cámbielas al negativo, interrogativo e
interrogativo negativo.

90 91
11

ll,l:l
'¡ 1

:11

'',¡l ,1,¡1,1'1111
 EJERCICIO 5 EJERCICIO 7
Traduzca estas oraciones. Cámbielas al tiempo pasado y tradúzcalas. Llene los espacios con la preposición correcta y traduzca.
l. It's time to eat. 6. We aren't afraid. l. He was here _ _ _ the 3rd _____ April.
2. What are the vases made of? 7. They aren't hungry. 2. 1 was in the United States ____ March.
3. What's it made of? 8. My uncle is warm. 3. Are you going to visit me _ _ _ June?
4. It isn't cold. 9. My aunt is thirsty. 4. Are you going to visit me the 4th-,-,--January?
5. He isn 't sleepy. 10. My brother is hungry. 5. There aren't classes the 5th May.
6. Mr. Martín doesn't work _ _ _ the 5th February.
7. I'm going to Cuemavaca April.
EJERCICIO 6 8. Were you here _____ June?
Llene los espacios con la preposición correcta y traduzca. 9. We can't go to school the 1st _______ January.
10. Alice was with her mother May.
l. The dining room is Gunto a) _ _ _ the living room.
2. There's a vase (en) the dining room table.
3. There are a lot offlowers (en) _ _ _ the vase. EJERCICIO 8
4. Do you live (cerca de) the school? Práctica Verbal
5. 1 think (en) my family.
1

6. He looks the teacher. l. He thinks about his family.

¡!' 1 11 ~ 7. We're going to Acapulco (por) two weeks. 2. He doesn't think about his family.
11,¡ 8. 1 can come (por) his house at twelve-thirty. 3. Does he think about his family?

~11
9. Why are you waiting me? 4. Doesn't he think about his family?
ll:il
!1:1!¡ 10. There's a wall (alrededor de) our house. 5. When does he think about his family?
•. ¡:¡ 11. There aren 't classes Sunday. 6. Why does he think about his family?
1''': 12. 1 was here (antes que) you. 7. Why doesn't he think about his family?
·,1
13. We think (en) our children. 8. He's thinking about his brother.
;li',lli 9. He isn't thinking about his brother.
¡,
11
'l 10. Is he thinking about his brother?
1' 11. lsn 't he thinking about his brother'!
1 ·11
LOS MESES 12. Why is .he thinking about his brother?
ll!lil 13. He's going to think about his mother.
¡,1
Aprenda los nombres de los meses. F¡Jese que se escriben con letra 14. He isn't going to think about his mother.
¡'
mayúscula. 15. ls he going to think about his mother?
! liilll 4. April abril 16. lsn't he going to think about his mother?
i!l l. January enero
'· 2. February febrero 5. May mayo 17. Why is he going to think about his mother?
1

3. March marzo 6. June junio 18. When is he going to think about his mother?
19. He likes to think about that.
Cuando no se indica la fecha exacta del mes, se usa la preposición 20. He doesn 't like to think about that.
in antes del nombre del mes. Ejemplos: in January, in March, in June 21. Does he like to think about that?
Cuando se indica la fecha exacta, se usan las preposiciones on y of 22. Doesn't he like to think about that?
con el número ordinal. Ejemplos: on the 5th of June-, on the lst of Jan- 23. Why does he like to think about that?
uary, on the 2nd of March 24. Why doesn't he like to think about that?

92 93
l
i
'¡\1'¡

1¡,1¡'

l.j
1·"
'1·'

1 ,·1\i

-
 EJERCICIO 11
25. He can think about that next year. Escriba en inglés.
26. He can't think about that next year.
27. Can he think about that next year? l. Los niños de la Sra. Hunt tenían mucha sed.
28. Can't he think about that next year? 2. ¿Dónde estuviste a las seis y media?
29. When can he think about that? 3. ¿De qué son sus cortinas (de Ud.)?
30. Why can't he think about that next year? 4. ¿Tiene tiempo de ir conmigo?
31. He has to think of his parents. S. ¿Dónde estaban todas las cosas?
32. He doesn't have to think of his parents. 6. Veo a la hija del Sr. Jackson todas las tardes.
33. Does he have to think of his parents? 7. Voy a ir a la ciudad de México el martes.
34. Doesn't he have to think ofhis parents? 8. Mi primo está sentado junto a mi tía.
35. Why does he have to think ofhis parents? 9. Yo creo que podemos acabar dentro de una hora.
10. Juan cumplió veinte años el cinco de enero.

EJERCICIO 9
EJERCICIO 12
Práctica Verbal Repita el ejercicio 8, usando formas de los verbos look
{at), clean, talk, finish en oraciones cortas. Use un sustantivo o pro- Dictado
nombre distinto con cada verbo. Use las palabras interrogativas what, l. How old are you? l'm twenty-six.
1

when, why, why not cuando se posible. 2. Why do we have to finish so early?
'1
1
3. 1 think of you every day.
4. John is going to eat in the dining room when he goes home.
EJERCICIO 10 S. What are you doing on the third floor?
Lea y traduzca estas oraciones y números. 6. What's it made of? It's made ofwood.
7. ls it time to eat?
l. 1 don't like to loo k at those flowers in that vase. 8. Why were you in the dining room?
2. 1 have to clean all the chairs and the rug and wash the wall. 9. Was it time to go to school?
3. Sit down. 1 want to talk to you. 10. Was Mary with John in the yard?
4. Frank's uncle lives on the third floor, and his cousin lives on the
fifth.
S. Where were you this morning? EJERCICIO 13
6. We have to eat on the second floor because the dining room is Conversación Conteste las siguientes preguntas.
there.
7. lt was very cold this morning. l. Where were you this morning?
8. The dining room table is made ofwood, metal, and glass. 2. Where was your brother?
9. Who lives on the first floor? 3. How old are you?
10. The fourth boy is Mr. Jackson's son. 4. How much money do you have?
11. 1 don't have an English book, so I'm going to take one of these. S. What time were you there?
12. Mr. Jackson lives over there in that big house, but he works over 6. What's it made of?
here in this office. 7. What were they made of?
13. Alice visits her aunt and uncle every night. 8. What's the chair made of?
14. 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 2nd 1st 3rd 5th 1st 2nd 3rd 9. What's the vase made of?
10. What are the doors made of?

. ,l 95
94
¡
¡ t'/!i

J.l! J ... ._ ,.,

 • y

lttll

\Y®@~LbDDilffJL?5® .. ___,
l. to ask preguntar 13. radio radio
to ask about preguntar por 14. record player tocadiscos
2. to answer contestar 15. light luz
3. to give dar; regalar 16. water agua
4. to tum on encender 17. gas gas
S. to tum off apagar 18. could podía, pudo
6. last último 19. ninth(9th) noveno
7. ready listo twelfth(12th) duodécimo
8. then entonces; después fifteenth (15th) décimo quinto
9. or o twentieth (20th) vigésimo
10. picture cuadro; película twenty-first(21st) vigésimo
11. kitchen cocina primero
12. stove estufa

~
MODISMOS
t 1

l. Tum on the light. Encienda la luz.

1
Tum on the record player. Ponga el tocadiscos.
Tum on the radio. Ponga el radio.
Tum on the TV. Ponga la televisión.
Tum on the water. Abra la llave del agua.
2. Tum off the light. Apague la luz.
Tum off the record player. Pare el tocadiscos.
Tum off the radio. Apague el radio.

1
96 97
· ¡Iil
L111
 Tum off the TV. Apague la televisión. 21. Can this man speak Spanish?
Tum off the water. Cierre la llave del agua. 22. Can't this man speak Spanish?
3. to ask pedirle (a alguien) 23. He was he re very early.
Ask your mother. Pídele a tu mamá. 24. He wasn 't he re very early.
to ask for pedir (algo) 2S. Was he he re very early?
Ask for the book. Pide el libro. 26. Wasn't he here very early?
to ask someone for something pedirle a alguien algo 27. He's going to be hungry.
Ask your mother for the book. Pídele el libro a tu mamá. 28. She's going to be sleepy.
4. Don't tell me. No me diga. 29. Thcy're going to be afraid.
S. What were you doing? ¿Qué estaba haciendo? ¿Qué hacía? 30. You're going to be hot.
6. I'm afraid to go, to come, etc. Tengo miedo de ir, venir, etc. 31. l'm going to be thirsty.
7. I'm afraid of John, of the water, etc. Le tengo miedo a Juan, al
agua, etc.
8. on Friday moming el viernes en la mañana EL TIEMPO PASADO PROGRESIVO
on Monday aftemoon el lunes en la tarde
on Sunday night el domingo en la noche El pasado de la fonna progresiva se construye con el tiempo pasado
del verbo be (was, were) y el gerundio (la fom1a ing) del verbo empleado.
Este tiempo se usa para expresar una acción continua en el pasado
EJERCICIO 1 o una acción que se llevaba a cabo mientras otra comenzó. Fíjese en
Traduzca las siguientes oraciones y practique leyéndolas. los ejemplos.

l. Come early. What were you doing? 1 was reading a book.

2. Don't come too early. ¿Qué hacías? Estaba leyendo un libro.
3. That manis looking at the house. 1 was washing the car when my father called me.
4. That man isn't looking at the house. Lavaba el coche cuando me llamó mi papá.
S. ls that man looking at the house?
6. lsn't that man looking at the house? Afirmativo
7. That girl is going to clean the windows. Yo estaba trabajando.
1 was working.
8. That girl isn't going to clean the windows. Él estaba trabajando.
He was working.
9. Is that girl going to clean the windows? Ellos estaban trabajando.
They were working.
1O. Isn 't that girl going to clean the windows?
11. These boys like to speak English. Negativo
12. These boys don't like to speak English.
13. Do these boys like to speak English? 1 wasn't workíng. '(o no estaba trabajando.
14. Don't these boys like to speak English? He wasn't workíng. El no estaba trabajando.
1S. Those children want to finish early. They weren't working. Ellos no estaban trabajando.
16. Those children don't want to finish early.
17. Do those children want to finish early? Interrogativo
18. Don't those children want to finish early? Recuerde el orden de las palabras para el interrogativo: auxiliar,
19. This man can speak Spanish. sustantivo o pronombre, verbo.
20. This man can't speak Spanish.

) 98 99
1,1

'1';111

11,11,111

1
1

\ '11'1 111

¡ ', J 1 ~1 ,'
 Auxiliar Sustantivo o Pronombre Verbo EL AUXILIAR COULD
Was 1 working? Could es el pasado del auxiliar can. La contracción en negativo es la
¿Estaba yo trabajando? palabra couldn't que equivale a could not. La forma del verbo que se
John working? usa después del auxiliar could es el infinitivo sin la partícula to. Fíjese
Was
¿Estaba Juan trabajando? en los ejemplos.
Afirmativo
Interrogativo Negativo
1 could go. Yo pude ir.
Auxiliar Sustantivo o Pronombre Verbo He could come. Él pudo venir.
!.!¡
Wasn't she working? They could help. Ellos pudieron ayudar.
¿No estaba ella trabajando?
11¡ Negativo
Weren't they working?
1 couldn't go. No pude ir.
¿No estaban ellos trabajando?
,11111111 He couldn't come. Él no pudo venir.
1!111
They couldn't help. Ellos no pudieron ayudar.
lli EJERCICIO 2
Recuerde el orden de las palabras para el interrogativo: auxiliar, sus-
11!1' Práctica Verbal
11
tantivo o pronombre, verbo.
l. He was cleaning the car.
2. He wasn't cleaning the car. Interrogativo
3. Was he cleaning the car?
4. Wasn't he cleaning the car? Sustantivo o
5. When was he cleaning the car? Auxiliar Pronombre Verbo
6. Why was he cleaning the car? Could 1 go?
7. Why wasn't he cleaning the car? ¿Pude (yo) . ')
u.

EJERCICIO 3 Could John help?

¿Pudo Juan ayudar?
Práctica Verbal Repita el ejercicio 2, usando formas de los verbos think
about (of), look (at), finish, speak, make, open, callen oraciones cortas. {When) could they help?
Use un sustantivo o pronombre distinto con cada verbo. Use las pala- ¿(Cuándo) pudieron ellos ayudar?
bras interrogativas cuando sea posible.
Interrogativo negativo Sustantivo o
'.11: EJERCICIO 4 Auxiliar Pronombre Verbo
:1!1,

1111
Traduzca las siguientes oraciones. Cámbielas al negativo, interrogativo e Couldn't 1 go?
interrogativo negativo. . '1
¿No pude (yo) u.
l. The boys were bringing the radio. Couldn't John help?
2. Helen's father was fmishing his work. ¿No pudo Juan ayudar?
3. Mrs. Jackson was making curtains.
4. George was feeling sick. {Why) couldn't they help?
) 5. Robert's sisters were getting up. ¿(Por qué) no pudieron ellos ayudar?
11

i 1

¡1 100 101
¡lillll
1
1

_,
\ ¡11' 11 1

. 1,'111

' 1 111:!,1¡1
 11 1 ~
1111111111
1 1

l 'l l il 2. Mis hermanos van a la casa de mi tía para trabajar.

1
EJERCICIO 5 3. El niño estaba estudiando para ser maestro.
'il l, 4. No pudimos usar estos lápices para escribir.
1,1 Práctica Verbal
1 1
1 1
5. Tenemos que encender la luz para leer.
1'11
1. You could walk home.
,¡!11"11
2. You couldn't walk home .
.. ,1!1"1 3. Could you walk home? LOS MESES
,''111'
,illl 4. Couldn't you walk home? Aprenda los nombres de los meses. F/jese que se escriben con letra
..,'¡'¡11·.
., 11''
5. Why couldn't you walk home? mayúscula .
11111
,11
l. July julio 4. October octubre
,111
EJERCICIO 6 2. August agosto 5. November noviembre
111111
Práctica verbal Repita/ el ejercicio 11, usando las formas de los verbos 3. September septiembre 6. December diciembre
·ll!lllll write, learn, bring, understand, go en oraciones cortas. Use un sustan-
tivo o pronombre distinto con cada verbo. Use las palabras interroga-
·ltl!llllll tivas cuando sea posible. EJERCICIO 10
Llene los espacios con la preposición correcta y traduzca.
'11111
EJERCICIO 7 Acuérdese de la regla que estudió en la lección anterior.
'1111
1
Traduzca las siguientes oraciones. Cámbielas al negativo, interrogativo e l. It's cold December .
i'l·'1'111.
. 111111 interrogativo negativo. 2. It's warm July.
¡1¡11.1 3. We don't go to school the 25th ____ December.
11 :11'! l. Those boys could read that book.
,111
4. We don't have to work the 20th _ _ _ November.
1
'¡il¡,fll 2. John's father could put the car in the garage.
3. That little girl could wait for her brother. 5. What were you doing October?
11'111''111111
4. Mr. and Mrs. Jackson could take the children to the country. 6. Were you here the 10th _ _ _ August?
'1.11
111
·1··11 5. John and you could teach Spanish.
!111
:1!!
EJERCICIO 11
l ,il¡l
¡,,1,1'
EJERCICIO 8 Práctica Verbal
ljl Traduzca las siguientes oraciones. Recuerde que no se traduce la par-
1,11
tfcula a entre el verbo y el complemento. l. Ask the teacher.
2. Don't ask the teacher.
l. Las muchachas estaban ayudando a su mamá. 3. They ask their mother.
2. Pregunte a su papá. 4. They don't ask their mother.
3. Llamen a los niños. 5. Do they ask their mother?
4. Voy a llevar a los niños al cine. 6. Don't they ask their mother?
7. Why do they ask their mother?
8. Why don't they ask their mother?
EJERCICIO 9 9. They 're asking their father.
',11'
¡,1·¡ Traduzca las siguientes oraciones. Recuerde que no se traduce la prepo- 10. They aren't asking their father.
¡.
¡1¡1 sición para antes de un infinitivo. 11 . Are they asking their father?
12. Aren't they asking their father?
:1¡ l. Vengo a la escuela para estudiar inglés.
1

103
'¡1,1

,·,l¡ll
102
1 :':1
! 1'1111,
1
' 1!•'111

1 111''1
,¡ ·1,111

~ ~
'

13. What are they asking their father? 10. Why couldn't he understand what you were saying?
14. Why are they asking their father? 11. We weren't hungry, but we were sleepy.
15. They were asking their cousins. 12. We're afraid it's going to be cold in the United States.
16. Thev weren't asking their cousins. 13. 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 15th 16th 17th
17. Were they asking their cousins? 18th 19th 20th 21st 22nd 23rd 24th 25th 31st 32nd
18. Weren 't they asking their cousins? 33rd 34th 35th
1
'.1 111 19. Why were they asking their cousins? 14. 18 88 17 77 16 66 15 55 14 44 13 33 19 99 20
'11
20. They're going to ask for water. 200 30 300
\1 !¡¡;!! 21. They aren't going to ask for water.
EJERCICIO 14
1
1
22. Are they going to ask for water?
111
•

1
'',

,1
11

1
23. Aren't they going to ask for water? Escriba en inglés.
24. They like to ask for candy.
,'1','11'1111111 25. They don't like to ask for candy. l. ¿Qué estaban haciendo los niños en el patio todas la tardes?
11
1 26. They want to ask for candy. 2. ¿Tenías sueño el viernes en la noche?
].:1 11\11

11.1¡! 27. They don't want to ask for candy. 3. No pongas la televisión porque estoy estudiando.
1
28. They have to ask for the money. 4. ¿Quién estaba escribiendo una carta en la sala?
)1 1

111,
29. Do they .have to ask for the money? 5. V oy a venir el domingo 31 de agosto.
'¡'1111 30. Don't they have to ask for the money? 6. ¿Cuántos años cumpliste el diecinueve de agosto?
11
7. Aquella familia vive en el tercer piso. Ésta vive en el primero.
8. Él escribía una carta, y yo leía un libro.
EJERCICIO 12 9. ¿Por qué tenías miedo a esa mujer?
Práctica Verbal Repita el ejercicio 71, usando las formas de los verbos
10. ¿Por qué no quieres venir para acá?
ask about, ask someone for something, answer, give, turn on, turn off.
11. Ella va a pedir un radio a su mamá.
Use un sustantivo o pronombre distinto con cada verbo. Use las pala-
bras interrogativas why y why not cuando sea posible.
EJERCICIO 15
Dictado

EJERCICIO 13 l. Those blue books are over there on that table.

Lea y traduzca estas oraciones y números. 2. He was seventeen years old on the 21st of January.
3. He's going to come on Sunday morning.
l. Turn off the water in the kitchen because it's running on the floor. 4. Why were you taking the radio to your room?
2. We're going toread first. Then we're going to speak English. 5. Why couldn't he live in Mexico City with his mother?
3. 1 was waiting for you. Why were you late? 6. We couldn't go because we were late.
4. lf you're ready to go, picase turn off the light. 7. Do you like to answer the teacher in English?
5. Picase turn on the lights in the dining room because 1 want to ea t. 8. That water in the kitchen is dirty.
Then turn on the lights in the living room because 1 want toread. 9. Does Mary want to read in the living room?
6. Were you working at six-thirty this morning? 10. Do you want to work in the kitchen?
7. Don't tell me that you aren't going to give me the money.
8. What were yo u doing in the living room?
9. Why don't you ask your father or your mother if you can eat
early?

104 105
1'1,

j lll'lill
'·1,1111¡11

,1 .. l lt
 EJERCICIO 16

~~
Conversación Conteste las siguientes preguntas.

l. How old were you on the 4th of July?

2.
3.
4.
How old is she going to be in June?
Where was your brother in September?
Why couldn't you go to school on Monday?
ittll
5. What's the stove made of!
6. What's the radio made of!
7. Where do you work?
8. What time is it?
9. What were you doing in m y room?
10. Where was your brother on Tuesday?

Conteste las siguientes preguntas en el afirmativo y en el negativo.

11. Were you in New York in March?
\Y®@ffilbmil~ITri® ---·---·~-·---. - ...,
12. Were you in Mexico City on the 5th of April?
13. Were you in the office at ten o'clock? l. to look (for) buscar 11. friend amigo
14. Were you turning on the record player? 2. to put on ponerse 12. bedroom recámara
15. Were you turning offthe water? 3. to forget olvidar 13. bed cama
16. Were you afraid ofthat man'? 4. to sleep dormir 14. shoes zapatos
17. Were you afraid to sit in that chair? S. to wear usar (ropa o 1S. hat sombrero
18. We.re you afraid to be in the garden? joyeria), llevar puesto 16. suit traje
19. Was he turning on the radio? 6. without sin 17. dress vestido
20. Could she ask the teacher? 7. soon pronto 18. there was, there were
21. Couldn't they ask forwater? 8. easy fácil había, hubo
22. Could she turn off the radio? 9. hard duro; difícil was there? were there?
23. Couldn't they answer the teacher? 10. today hoy ¿había? ¿hubo?
·----,--~-'-"'""~~~'"'""'''"---~"''"""-'""_""_'<''"'""""' _ _ _ ,_,,"'_""""""'_.. _ _ _ _ ,
24. Is there going to be water?
25. lsn't there going to be light?
MODISMOS

'r,, l. When is your birthday? ¿Cuándo es su cumpleafios?

,'i, 2. of course por supuesto, claro (que)
1
3. last week la semana pasada
last month el mes pasado
last year el año pasado
last night anoche
4. tonight esta noche
S, 1 put on my hat. Me pongo el sombrero.
He puts on his suit. Él se pone el traje.
{En inglés se emplea el ad¡etivo poseszvo con articulas de vestir.)
'11
106 107
1111

1
,, 1 l,l' ¡·l

IJ', 1',
~
 4. How many beds are there in the bedroom?
EJERCICIO 1 5. How many of your friends are there in the living room?
Traduzca las siguientes oraciones y practique leyéndolas. 6. There are thirty or forty children over there in the street.
7. Is there a chair in your bedroom?
l. I'm afraid to go.
8. Why is there a chair in the kitchen?
2. I'm not afraid to go.
9. There are thirty-one days in December.
3. They're afraid to come.
4. They aren't afraid to come. 1O. There are two cars in our garage.
1
'1
11
1,
5. He's afraid of John.
,!1 6. He isn't afraid of John.
7. Answer the teacher. EJERCICIO 3
11!1
1' 8. Don't answer the teacher. Traduzca las siguientes oraciones. Cámbielas al negativo, interrogativo e
1
1
11, ' 9. Answer me. interrogativo negativo.
'11111
10. Don't answer me.
11
1

11. Miss Monroe has to answer. l. There were a lot of shoes in the bedroom.
111'

12. Miss Monroe doesn't have to answer. 2. There were two young American girls here.
11,¡1
13. Does Miss Monroe have to answer? 3. There was a hat on the sofa.
,l 14. Doesn't Miss Monroe bave to answer? 4. There were two dresses next to the blue suit.
15. When does Miss Monroe have to answer? 5. There was a man here this moming.
,, 16. Miss Monroe was asking for money. 6. There were two cars in the street.
1 1111,11
''1
17. Miss Monroe wasn't asking for m.oney.
18. Was Miss Monroe asking for money?
11 11111,
1,111 19. Wasn't Miss Monroe asking for money? EJERCICI04
1' 11111
20. When was Miss Monroe asking for money? Traduzca las siguientes oraciones y practique leyéndolas.
1'1
¡11:1¡1 21. Why was Miss Monroe asking for money?
llj l. There was a lot in the yard.
1 22. What was Miss Monroe asking for?
2. There were two boys in the park.
3. Were there too many boys?
HAB(A, HUBO- THERE WAS, THERE WERE 4. Wasn't there a suit on the bed?
5. How many dresses were there in the bedroom?
There was y there were es el tiempo pasado de there is y there are. 6. Why weren't there five dresses?
Equivalen estas formas a hubo o había en español. There was es sin- 7. There weren't two boys with Pete.
gular y there were es plural. Was there y were there son las formas 8. Were there two or three hats?
interrogativas, y there wasn't y there weren't son las formas negativas. 9. There was aman with my father.
10. There were two hats anda suit.

EJERCICIO 2
Traduzca las siguientes oraciones. Cámbielas al tiempo pasado y tra-
ADVERBIOS DE FRECUENCIA
duzca.
Aprenda estos adverbios de frecuencia.
l. There's a phone in the office. l. always siempre 2. usually usualmente,
1! ',11
2. There are four floors in that house. generalmente
li.1 '11
'1 3. There's a notebook on the desk .

11
1
1¡1

108 .... 109

11
1

1 1¡1
1
1 '. 1111
1111

1 '1111!1

¡,.',11111,1
11,111,
~~
 3. often a menudo 8. Can't you ever be early? (ever se usa con verbo en
7. ever alguna vez, a veces negativo y se coloca antes del
4. seldom rara vez 8. never nunca, jamás
5. rarely rara vez verbo principal be por
9. not. .. ever nunca, jamás llevar auxiliar)
6. sometimes algunas veces,
a veces
Se colocan los adverbios de frecuencia antes de todos los verbos EJERCICIO 5
principales, menos las formas del verbo be. Con formas del verbo be
Coloque los adverbios de frecuencia en su lugar correcto y traduzca.
se colocarán después, a menos que éste tenga auxiliar. El verbo princi·
pal es el verbo de la oración, que no es auxiliar. l. (usually) We work on Saturday.
El adverbio ever no debe emplearse en oraciones afirmativas, te- 2. (often) They go to the movies on Sunday.
lj niendo que sustituirse por su equivalente sometimes, o algún otro ad- 3. (sometimes) John studies in the afternoon.
'1!. verbio, tal como always, usually, often. 4. (always) 1 am late.
,. Sin embargo, ever puede emplearse en oraciones interrogativas y 5. (seldom) The children speak English.
1 cuando el verbo está en negativo. 6. (rarely) 1 visit my grandmother.
'1•
,!'¡ Never equivale a ever con el verbo en negativo (not. .. ever). Estudie 7. (never) Mike eats a lot.
''1 estas oraciones.
1 ,¡ 8. (always) That child is sick.
1. He can never come early. 9. ( usually) Those curtains are dirty.
j, or (never y ever se colocan antes 10. (often) Mr. Jackson is here.
11 He can't ever come early. del verbo principal come) 11. (always) He can't visit his friend.
1 ¡
12. (ever) ls he here at eight o'clock?
2. He never comes early.
(never y ever se colocan antes 13. (sometimes) Are they here at eight o'clock?
1 i or
14. (ever) He doesn't get up early.

~
del verbo principal come)
He doesn 't ever come early.
¡ 15. (usually) Do they eat everything?
3. He 's never early. 16. (always) He can be here at six.
(never y ever se colocan después
or
He isn 't ever early. del verbo is, forma del verbo be)
EJERCICIO 6
4. Does he ever come early? (ever y sometimes se colocan Conteste las siguientes preguntas en el afirmativo y el negativo, usando
or antes del verbo principal come) uno de los adverbios de frecuencia.
•l¡' Does he sometimes come
1,'
•:j'i early? l. Do you ever read that book?
'1'''
1!.' 2. Do you ever go to school on Saturday?
' 5. Doesn't he ever come (ever se usa con verbo en 3. Do you ever visit your cousin?
1!1 early? negativo y se coloca antes del 4. Don't you ever eat mangos?
¡;¡,
verbo principal come) 5. Don't you ever work on Sunday?
!.·!
6. Don't you ever study your English?
6. Does he usually come early? (usually se coloca antes del 7. Doesn't he ever write letters?
verbo principal come) 8. Does he always take his book?
9. Doesn't he always come early?
7. Doesn't he always come early? (always se coloca antes del 10. Do they often eat here?
' verbo principal come) 11 . Do they often write a lot of letters?
11:

110 111
. ¡11¡

l, '1
'ti ·11

j,,ll
 12. Don't they often see their parents?
i,l¡l 13. Does she usually study on Monday? Auxiliar Sustantivo o Pronombre Verbo
14. Does she usually open the door?
a trabajar?
¿Iba yo
15. Doesn't she usually study her English?
16. Does he sometirnes go with you? Was he going to eat?
17. Do es he sometirnes answer in English? ¿Iba él a comer?
18. Doesn't he sometirnes speak Spanish? (When) were they going to come?
19. Do you ever go to the movies? ¿(Cuándo) iban ellos a venir?
20. Are you ever sleepy in the afternoon?
21. Do you ever see American movies? Interrogativo Negativo
1'(
'1,,
1 22. Don't you ever wear a hat?
1
11'
il'
23. ls he always in the office at eight o'clock? Wasn't going to work?
1
!l 24. ls he always in the garden? ¿No iba yo a trabajar?
25. lsn 't he always at the office in the morning? he going to eat?
.1
Wasn't
'.1
¿No iba él a comer?
(Why) weren't they going to come?
EL TIEMPO PASADO a venir?
¿(Por qué) no iban ellos
DEL FUTURO IDIOMÁTICO

El tiempo pasado del futuro idiomático se forma con el tiempo pa-

EJERCICIO 7
sado del verbo be (was, were), la palabra going, más un infmitivo.
Compare el inglés con el espafiol. Práctica Verbal

Afirmativo l. They were going to be ready.

2. They weren't going to be ready.
1 was going to work. Yo iba a trabajar. 3. W ere they going to be ready?
He was going to eat. Él iba a comer. 4. Weren't they going to be ready?
They were going to come. Ellos iban a venir. 5. When were they going to be ready?
6. Why weren't they going to be ready?
Negativo
1 wasn't going to work. Yo no iba a trabajar. EJERCICIO 8
He wasn't going to ea t. Él no iba a comer. Práctica Verbal Repita el ejercicio 7, usando las formas de los verbos
''1¡,' They weren't going to come. Ellos no iban a venir.
get up, wake up, finish, eat, make en oraciones cortas. Use un sustan-
1,' tivo o pronombre distinto con cada verbo. Use las palabras interroga-
Interrogativo
11 tivas cuando sea posible.
Recuerde el orden de las palabras para el interrogativo: auxiliar, sus-
1

tantivo o pronombre, verbo. EJERCICIO 9

lil
l¡¡il Traduzca las siguientes oraciones. Cámbielas al tiempo pasado y tra-
Auxiliar Sustantivo o Pronombre Verbo
duzca.
1 Was 1 going to work? l. Henry is going to be a doctor.

:j
11
112 113
1 1 ¡ !11¡¡¡'1 1 ~
'1'
'".'l \1'1'1'·'.
1

!1·1·¡,1
fl ji'
2. Are you going to look at everything? 17. He isn't going to look for the book.
3. Aren't you going to look at my new dress? 18. He's never going to look for the book.
4. She isn 't going to tu m off the radio. 19. He isn't ever going to look for the book.
5. My sister isn't going to speak English. 20. ls he ever going to look for the book?
6. Are you going to sit in that chair? 21. lsn't he ever going to look for the book?
7. When are they going to bring a lot of books? 22. lsn't he going to look for the book?
8. Alice and Virginia are going to wash their dresses. 23. He was going to look for his sister.
9. I'm not going to use my book on Tuesday aftemoon. 24. He wasn't going to look for his sister.
10. My family isn't going to live in Mexico. 25. Was he going to look for his sister?
'11
¡,¡
26. Wasn't he going to look for his sister?
27. Where was he going to look for his sister?
1'1!! EJERCICIO 10 28. Why was he going to look for his sister?
Traduzca las siguientes oraciones. Cámbielas al negativo, interrogativo e
29. He could loo k for the notebook.
1!
30. He couldn't look for the notebook.
interrogativo negativo.
31. Could he look for the notebook?
l. We were going to study last night. 32. Couldn't he look for the notebook?
2. His friend was going to open all the doors. 33. Where could he look for the notebook?
3. She was going to leam the days of the week. 34. He often likes to look for new friends.
4. Our cousins were going to ask their parents. 35. He seldom likes to look for new friends.
¡i tl¡i 5. Mike was going to put his hat in the living room.
~,,, i /,', ¡, !¡¡'11 6. They were going to visit Texas in October.
l ! EJERCICIO 12
¡1'
, 1

Práctica Verbal Repita el ejercicio 7 7, usando formas de los verbos put

,11¡'
,, EJERCICIO 11 on, forget, sleep, wear en oraciones cortas. Use un sustantivo o pro-
!
Práctica Verbal nombre distinto con cada verbo y los adverbios de frecuencia cuando
sea posible.
l. He always looks for pictures.
2. He doesn't always look for pictures.
3. Does he always loo k for pictures? EJERCICIO 13
4. Doesn't he always look for pictures?
5. Why does he always loo k for pictures? Lea y traduzca las siguientes oraciones. Lea los números.
6. He's always looking for pictures.
l. 1 was going to go to the United States last month, but 1 couldn't
7. He isn't always looking for pictures.
8. Is he always looking for pictures? because 1 was sick.
2. Henry thinks English is very hard to learn, but Ann thinks it's
9. lsn't he always looking for pictures?
10. He was always looking for pictures. easy.
3. Is that my daughter or your daughter with the dirty dress?
11. He wasn't always looking for pictures.
12. Was he always looking for pictures? 4. That's your daughter. My daughter is over here.
¡1 5. This little girl is very sad because she has to wear her old dress.
13. Wasn't he always looking for pictures?

1~: 14. Where was he always looking for pictures? 6. The boys are very happy because they don't have to go to school on
15. Why was he always looking for pictures? Friday afternoon; and, of course, the girls are happy too.
16. He's going to look for the book. 7. We were ready to eat, but we weren't hungry.

¡'¡';
!:lli:
114 115
,'1

~1
f~~
111.¡11·1¡¡

l¡'li
1
8. Why don't you put on your new suit and hat? EJERCICIO 16
:¡1111' 9. My friend can't go because he can't walk without his shoes. Conversación Conteste las siguientes preguntas.
10. Today is the last day of the month, and tomorrow is the first day
of the new month. l. What's the house made of?
11. They always eat in the dining room. They never eat in the kitchen. 2. What are the windows made of?
12. Put on your blue suit. Don't put on your green suit because it 3. What's it made of?
isn't clean. 4. How old were you in April?
13. Where were you looking for your hat? 1t was in the bedroom. 5. When is your birthday?
14. 125 250 375 400 190 280 500 366 255 144 500 6. Where do you live?
,J
422 555 666 444 333 222 111 121 21st 22nd 7. What time do you go to school?
lli¡'¡
23rd 24th 25th 26th 31st 32nd 35th 33rd 41st 8. What time do you go to work?
42nd 53rd 54th 71st 62nd 9. What are you doing?
10. What were you doing?
11. How many dresses were there in the bedroom?
EJERCICIO 14 12. How many chairs are there in the living room?
Escriba en inglés.
Conteste las siguientes preguntas en el afirmativo y en el negativo.
l. ¿Por qué llevabas tu nuevo traje azul?
13. Do you ever like to get up early?
2. Había dos camas en la recámara.
1 1 1 ~ 1

3. ¿Qué buscas ahora? Busco mi cuaderno.

14. Do you ever like to get up late?
1S. Does he sometimes want to visit his aunt?
4. Por supuesto, voy a estudiar el lunes en la noche.
1
16. Does he want to finish his work early?
S. ¿Hubo un joven en aquel coche?
11 17. Can they usually answer in English?
,. 1!
6. No se te olvide visitar a tu amigo pronto.
18. Do you ever go to the movies?
1 ¡ 1¡¡1
7.
8.
¿Por qué nunca estudia él?
Rara vez ve aquella mujer a sus tíos (tío y tía). 19.
20.
Was there a chair in the dining room?
Were there two record players in the house?
9. Generalmente no uso sombrero.
10. Todos los niños iban a dormir en aquella cama grande. 21. Are you going to sleep in the bedroom?
1
22. Were you going to sleep in the living room?
23. Is she cleaning the kitchen?

1~ EJERCICIO 15 24. Was she cleaning the rug?

25. Can they turn on the water?
1 Dictado
1,,!11
l. Were you visiting your aunt and uncle in Mexico last year?
2. Don't forget to wear your hat because it's very hot.
3. My son puts on his shoes when he gets up.
1
,¡ 4. l'm ready, so don't go without me.
i S. 1t isn't easy to walk fast when you're wearing new shoes.
6. We're going to have flowers in our garden very soon.
11 l, 1
~~ ;1
7. 1 often go to my uncle's house, but 1 never see you there.
jiji ·''1
8. What are you looking for?
¡! ,11
9. He says that he rarely gets up before ten o'clock on Sunday.
1 10. We couldn't go to the movies on Friday because it was very cold.
111

1
1
··l!¡

1'
11
116 117
·. ¡1 ,,'¡,

¡1
~1'11'¡¡¡,
Tl~:l l·l·\1 1111¡1

111

1/1111

·'1111

•,1111
1
8. The people are working. La gente está trabajando.
·1 9. There was going to be time. Iba a haber tiempo.
,lil
1
There were going to be boys. Iba a haber muchachos.

~~ió•• TI~
11',

,,11
1

1\ EJERCICIO 1
Traduzca las siguientes oraciones y practique leyéndolas.
l. There was always a car in the garage.
2. Was there always a car in the garage?
3. There were often three women there.
4. Were there often three women there?
S. My cousin wants to look for the book.
6. My cousin doesn't want to look for the book.
7. Does my cousin want to loo k for the book?
8. Doesn't my cousin want to look for the book?
\J®@~wmD~L?n® _w_,.____. ~~-·--,.·-~---
9.
10.
The children are putting on their shoes.
The children aren't putting on their shoes.
l. to go back, went back regresar, 8. yesterday ayer 11. Are the children putting on their shpes?
1111
11!
regresó (de acá para allá) 9. bathroom baño 12. Aren't the children putting on their shoes?
2. to laugh (at), laughed (at) 10. thing cosa 13. My brother was forgetting everything.
1 reírse (de), se rió (de) 11. country campo; país 14. My brother wasn't forgetting everything.
12. store tienda lS. Was my brother forgetting everything?
jl,ll¡1:: 3. to pass, passed pasar, pasó
13. question pregunta 16. Wasn't my brother forgetting everything?
1
4. to nx, fixed arreglar, arregló;
' , :1:¡¡1
componer, compuso 14. lesson lección 17. J ohn's friend is going to sleep he re.
S. to need, needed necesitar, lS. word palabra 18. John's friend isn't going to sleep here.
• i 111
necesitó 16. people (plural) gente 19. ls John's friend going to sleep here?
6. only solamente; único 17. men hombres 20. lsn't John's friend going to sleep here?
7. each cada 18. women mujeres 21. The students want to ask a question.
lllj!
22. The students don't want to ask a question.
23. Do the students want to ask a question?
,'1!1 MODISMOS 24. Don't the students want to ask a question?
li

",
1

11 l. to ask a question hacer una pregunta

1' 2. to watch TV ver la televisión EL TIEMPO PASADO
l.
1

·1¡'
3. what kind? ¿qué clase? . DE LOS VERBOS REGULARES
' 1
What kind of candy do you like? ¿Qué clase de dulces le gustan?
' 1 11 ~ 4. all kinds toda clase El tiempo pasado en inglés corresponde en castellano al pretérito
1

1 like all kinds of candy. Me gusta toda clase de dulces. (miré, miraste, etc.; viví, viviste, etc.) y en ocasiones al copretérito (mi-
11
111 S. in the morning en la mañana raba, mirabas, etc.; vivía, vivías, etc.).
,lllil 6. in the aftemoon en la tarde Se forma el tiempo pasado de los verbos regulares agregando ed al
'.1
¡1111
7. at night en la noche, de noche infmitivo sin la partícula to. Si el verbo termina en e, solamente se agre-
;1'111,¡1,
118 119
11¡
1·1

"1
11

•• 1 11

;, ' \111
ij .,! ¡1,1,11
1rl
1 r,i'l.lll 1!111
1

'1;1

ga d. Ejemplos: 1 looked (at) (Yo miré, Yo miraba). He lived (Él vivió, silaba, o cuando el verbo conste de una sola silaba en esta misma.
Él vivía). answer answered open opened
En el afirmativo del pasado la forma del verbo no sufre ningún cam- tumon tumed on
call called
bio. Es igual en todas las personas. Estudie las siguientes formas. tum off tumed off
clean cleaned
leam learned study studied
1 worked yo trabajé, trabajaba live lived use u sed
you worked tú trabajaste, trabajabas
l¡l
you worked Ud. trabajó, trabajaba
1,,
he worked él trabajó, trabajaba EJERCICIO 2
1
.'1,
she worked ella trabajó, trabajaba Traduzca las siguientes oraciones y practique leyéndolas.
'111¡!
1111 it worked trabajó, trabajaba
1'1
11
we worked trabajamos, trabajábamos l. 1 asked a lot of questions.
111' you worked Uds. trabajaron, trabajaban 2. You finished at eight-thirty.
1,!,1 they worked ellos trabajaron, trabajaban 3. You fixed the radio.
111

4. He helped bis father.

5. She laughed at the boys.
LA PRONUNCIACIÓN 6. We liked it a lot.
DE LA TERMINACIÓN ED 7. They looked at the picture.
8. They passed by my house.
Para la pronunciación de la terminación ed hay tres reglas: 9. 1 talked to my frien d.
10. You worked every aftemoon.
l. Si el infmitivo termina en sonido de d o t, la terminación ed se 11. She washed her dresses at night.
pronuncia como una sílaba más. 12. He walked borne.
visit visited want wanted 13. She visited her friend.
wait (for) waited (for) need needed 14. We waited every day.
15. You wanted to go borne.
2. Si el infmitivo termina con sonido de e, eh, f, k, p, s, sh, x, la ter- 16. They answered the phone.
minación ed se pronuncia como t, incorporando el sonido de la t 17. 1 called my sister.
en la pronunciación de la última silaba, o cuando el verbo conste 18. You cleaned the kitchen.
de una sola silaba en esta misma. 19. You leamed a lot ofSpanish.
20. He lived in the United States.
laugh (at) laughed (at) walk walked 21. She opened a11 the windows.
ask asked help helped 22. We studied everything.
like liked wash washed 23. You turned on the light.
look (at) looked (at) pass passed 24. They turned off the radio.
'11
look (for) looked (for) fmish fmished 25. 1 used John's phone.
'1
11 talk talked fiX fiXed 26. He needed a lot ofthings.
11
work worked 27. She liked to work.
,i¡ll 28. They liked to go.
1 1\ 11 1,
3. En todos los otros casos la terminación ed se pronuncia como d, 29. He wanted to come.
incorporando el sonido de la d en la pronunciación de la última 30. We wanted to wait.
!¡1~ 1'
1

1¡

jl'l 120 121

1,11
1'

1',1'

il
L 1 \ .. ~\~~~
,~., ¡, 1,1111
1
 l'llljll
' '1111
,1

Present Past Present Past

EJERCICIO 3 know knew understand understood
Llene los espacios con el tiempo pasado del verbo indicado y traduzca. make made wake up woke up
put put wear wore
l. (ask) We the teacher many questions. put on put on write wrote
2. (fmish) The men their work last night.
3. (laugh at) The children the people in the store.
,¡,1
4. (look at) The women the nice houses on that street. EJERCICIO 4
5. (look for) John _ _ _ bis hat in the bedroom. Traduzca las siguientes oraciones y practique leyéndolas.
6. (flx) Mr. Johnson the window in the bathroom.
7. (visit) 1 Veracmz in January. l. 1 was at home. 15. He put on his shoes.
8. (wait for) My friend me last night for an hour. 2. I brought it today. 16. They read the letter.
1, ' "'11,
~- (want) Alice to go to the movies. 3. You carne yesterday. 17. 1 said that.
1,·1'1'1-
111' 10. (call) He the boys yesterday. 4. She ate dinner. 18. You saw all the men.
111 11. (use) Miss J ohnson that book last year. 5. He felt sick. 19. She sat down.
'1,1'
12. (turn on) We the light at night. 6. We forgot the money. 20. They slept a lot.
13. (clean) My mother the living room in the afternoon. 7. You got up early. 21. She spoke English.
14. (open) Mrs. Carter the windows and doors every morning. 8. They gave their word. 22. We took the notebooks.
15. (study) We English every day. 9. She went to the movies. 23. You taught English.
10. You carne on Tuesday. 24. 1 thought about you.
11. He had the money. 25. They understood Spanish.
EL PASADO DE 12. She knew everything. 26. He woke up at six-thirty.
LOS VERBOS IRREGULARES 13. We knew that man. 27. She wore a dress.
14. She made a lot. 28. We wrote a book.
No hay regla para saber cómo formar el pasado de los verbos irregu-
lares. Hay que aprender los verbos irregulares de memoria. Tanto para
los verbos regulares como para los verbos irregulares no hay ningún EJERCICIO 5
cambio en la conjugación del pasado en afirmativo. Llene los espacios con el tiempo pasado del verbo indicado y traduzca.
Present Past Present Past l. (see) 1 that movie last week.
was, were read read 2. (bring) The two pictures that my uncle _____ from
am, is, are
1

bring brought run ran Mexico are on the wall.

11

11¡11¡1
carne say said 3. (come) My aunt _ _ _ to see me at five o'dock.
come
1
',·11 1,

did see saw 4. (eat) The boys in the garden on Friday.

do
11¡111

ate sit (down) sat (down) 5. (say, fecl) Mary ____ that she _____ sick last week.
1¡1¡
eat
',,11
felt sleep slept 6. (forget, put) 1 _ _ _ to give you the money that
,,11 fe el
1¡,11 forget forgot speak spoke I on the table.
'i¡ get up got up take too k 7. (get up) We ____ late on Sunday.
gave teach taught 8. (give) He ______ me money for everything .
.' 111',
give
'1
' 11,' went tell told 9. (go) The Carter Family to the United States last month.
go
' ¡'il think thought 10. (have, come) Robert ten suits when he to
go back went back
1,'11''
,,11'11' have had think thought Mexico the flrst time.
(about, of) (about, of)
123
111''
,11111'1'
,,,11.

,1,1
111
¡(1¡
1
122
11 111

i
j
l¡, 1
1¡'¡',

lJ
'','~:,:~,I:,
1' 11'11,11,
¡~ 1 1' '~
!f
11. (speak, be) Atice _ _ _ Spanish when she in Mexico. 2. He doesn't always go back early.
3. Does he always go back early?
12. (understand, read) John and Robert every word
4. Doesn't he always go back early?
they - - i n that book.
13. (put on, run) The children their shoes and into 5. Why does he always go back early?
6. He went back early.
the garden.
14. (sleep. wake up) l for eíght hours last níght and at 7. He usually went back early.
seven- twenty. 8. He rarely went back early.
lS. (think, teach) He ofhis cousin who English in 9. He never went back early.
that school. 10. She's going to go back late.
16. (make, wear) Mary ____ a new green dress and _it 11. She isn't going to go back late.
to school. 12. ls she going to go back late?
13. lsn't she going to go back late?
17. (write) Who thatletter?
18. (sit down, think) l in that chair near the window 14. Why is she going to go back late?
and about my work in the office. 1S. They were going to go back at six.
19. (know) William all the words. 16. They weren't going to go back at six.
20. (go back) Mrs. Davis _ _ _ to Monterrey in July. 17. Were they going to go back at six?
18. Weren't they going to go back at six?
19. Why were they going to go back at six?
20. He can go back home.
EJERCICI06 21. He can never go back home.
Coloque los adverbios de frecuencia en su lugar correcto y traduzca.
22. He can't ever go back home .
23. Can he ever go back home?
l. (usually) Do you get up late on Sunday?
. .1 2. (sometimes) We went to the movies at night. 24. Can't he ever go back home?
2S. Why can't he ever go back home?
3. ( seldom) He was late for his English class.
26. He could go back home.
4. (always) They got up late in the morning.
27. He could never go back home.
S. (never) l spoke Spanish to my English teacher.
28. He couldn't ever go back home.
6. (ever) Do you speak Spanish to your teacher?
29. Could he ever go back home?
7. (sometimes) The children ate a lot. 30. Couldn't he ever go back home?
8. (rarely) They visit their grandfather in the afternoon.
31. Why couldn't he ever go back home?
9. (often) They don't wear their new shoes and dresses.
32. He wants to go back in the morning.
10. (ever) Don't they clean the curtains and the rug?
33. He doesn't want to go back in the morning.
11. ( always) He is sick at night. 34. Does he want to go back in the morning?
12. (ever) Weren't you in New York in January? 35. Doesn't he want to go back in the morning?
13. (never) They can get up befare ten o'clock.
14. (often) Couldn't the boys go to the movies?
lS. (ever) Do the children wash befare they go to school?
EJERCICIO 8
Práctica Verbal Repita el ejercicio 7, usando formas de los verbos laugh
·1 EJERCICIO 7 at, pass, need, ask a question, watch TV en oraciones cortas. Use las
Práctica Verbal palabras interrogativas when y why y los adverbios de frecuencia
cuando sea posible.
l. He always goes back early.
125
124
~ \,,
MI
~!!]1
EJERCICIO 9
EJERCICIO 10
Lea y traduzca estas oraciones y fechas.
Escriba en inglés.
l. Only two of the boys needed to bring their books.
2. What kind of dresses were those women looking for? l. ¿Quién dijo que iba a hacer frío en abril?
3. We saw all kinds of shoes, hats, and suits in the window of that 2. Teníamos mucha hambre, pero no pudimos comer.
store. 3. Él vivió y trabajó diez años en Estados Unidos.
4. He wanted to put everything on the table, but he said he couldn't 4. Enrique me iba a visitar el quince de septiembre, pero no pudo.
be cause the table was dirty. 5. ¿Qué hora es? No sé, pero es demasiado tarde para ir al parque.
5. I don't want to go back to the United States in December because 6. Había toda clase de cosas bonitas en aquella tienda.
''
~
!,¡
1
1'
it's very cold. 7. ¿Qué clase de vestido quiere llevar?
1 ,¡ 6. We laughed at William because he was looking for his hat in the 8. Ellos necesitaban diez hombres para hacer todo este trabajo.
,,l bedroom, and it was in the living room. 9. Si Juan puede arreglar el coche, ¿por qué no podemos ir al cine?
7. If yo u aren't sic k on Wednesday, are you going to the movies? 10. Juan no pudo componer el coche. Por eso no pudimos ir al cine.
8. Each man said, "Thank you and good-bye," when he passed by the
woman.
9. He couldn't answer all the questions in English, so he answered EJERCICIO 11
sorne of the questions in Spanish.
Dictado
10. We knew that the tenth lesson was going to be very hard. That's
why we studied for three hours. l. He flxed that table in the dining room, but we can't use it.
11. I had many nice things to give the children-all kinds of dresses 2. 1 passed by his house, but 1 couldn't see a light, so 1 don't think he
and suits anda book for each one. was at home.
12. Was it very cold in New York when you were there? 3. The boys laughed at the movie.
13. There was no room in the living room, and it was so hot in the 4. Miss Nelson went back home on the 4th of July.
dining room that we felt sick. 5. It was very late. That's why we couldn't go to the movies.
14. If we put all the things that Mr. Jackson needs on the table, he 6. lf he comes early on Monday, we're going to loo k for al! kinds
can fix the bathroom when he comes. ofshoes.
15. Is Jolm's little brother too small to wear this suit that Robert's 7. 1 don't have to take m y book because 1 know all the words in the
mother bmught? 1esson.
16. December 3, 1920 July 4, 1776 January 23, 1955 April 1, 8. Mike said he knew that man when he lived in Texas.
¡1
1938 August 31, 1866 June 22, 1694 March 25, 1559 9. The teacher gave each boya pencil and each girl a pen.
May 2, 1915 November 11, 1918 February 15, 1886 10. Only ten boys could read the lesson because there were only five
on the 15th of September books.
on the 30th of J anuary
¡¡ on the 12th of October
EJERCICIO 12
!¡' on the 31st of July
i~ i
1

on the 7th of May Conversación Conteste las siguientes preguntas.

'¡
'1' on the 2nd of April
l. What kind of books do you like to read?
~
on the 1st of March
!11111¡ on the 3rd ofNovember 2. Do you like to see a11 kinds of movies?
on the 13th of September 3. What's your first name?
4. What's your last name?
1!

on the 21st of June

'1111
1'1
5. How old are you?
1!
1',11
1

'!
126 127
1

i 1

~ll\ili;
~~·:11'111·¡
1 '

' i 1

.111
1!'

cciitll ~~
,1'
11 6. When is your birthday?
7. What day was yesterday?
8. Were you watching TV last night?
9. Do you always watch TV?
10. Does he like to watch TV?
• 1
1¡ 11. How many minutes are there in an hour?
11,, 12. How many hours are there in a day?
13. How many days are there in a week?
14. How many days are there in ayear?
15. How many weeks are there in ayear?
11:
1'1 :1 16. How many weeks are there in a month?
11,'¡
1 '1 17. How many months are there in ayear?
11111.
•11:11.
111¡
11,1 Conteste las siguientes preguntas en el afirmativo y en el negativo.
1,1111

18. Do you go to the movies every day?

19. Do you see your cousin every moming? \7®@a::!ID\JDDEDIT~0!
20. Do you always bring your books to school? l. to buy, bought comprar, 9. same mismo
21. Are you laughing at me? compró 10. more más
22. Are they laughing at Mary? 2. to sell, sold vender, vendió 11. almost casi
23. Was there going to be time? 3. to find, found encontrar, 12. which cuál
24. Were there going to be a lot of people? encontró 13. breakfast desayuno
4. to begin, began empezar, 14. supper cena, merienda
empezó 15. soup sopa
S. to drink, drank tomar, tomó; 16. milk leche
beber, bebió 17. egg huevo
6. to get, got conseguir, 18. bread pan
consiguió a loaf of bread un pan
!,1
•1' 7. both los dos, ambos (de caja)
'·1
,11 8. about como; cerca de; 19. butter mantequilla
11;

¡i¡'i unos; aproximadamente 20. meat carne

111''111•
1¡1¡1, 1 ,

111111.
1¡1,1¡

11·,(,, MODISMOS
1•

•:1
.,"'' l. When is your saint's day? ¿Cuándo es su santo?
2. What's the matter with John? ¿Qué pasa con Juan? ¿Qué tiene Juan~
'~!' ':,',
¡,'11¡1 3. What happened to John? ¿Qué pasó con Juan? ¿Qué le pasó a Juan?
; 1''1
4. Will you please ... ? ¿(No) me quieres ... ?
·i~·l'
¡1

'. Will you please give me the book? ¿(No) me quieres dar ellibro 1
1¡1',11
1'1',.,:1 Will you pleasc do me a favor? ¿(No) me quieres hacer un favor')
¡¡11.,111

1¡11',111
129
128
'/11¡1111
1' 11'1
¡1 1,'1'¡1

·,:::,,

~
• 1 ,1'1'
'1 ,'111:
':·lil.' 1
1
¡11'
1
l,l,l•i,1 l',
'.'~.11,1.1
11

,,, 11 i

1 l 5. the day after tomorrow pasado mañana

the day before yesterday anteayer
EL AUXILIAR DID
Como auxiliar, did se usa en preguntas y negaciones en el pasado con
6. What did you say? ¿Cómo dijo? todos los verbos menos con las formas del verbo be y otros auxiliares
1 7. to eat (have) breakfast desayunar( se) como can y could. Did sirve para todas las personas, y se usa con el in-
'1 8. to eat (have) dinner comer (la comida principal) fmitivo sin la partícula to.
1',1 9. to eat (have) supper cenar, merendar La contracción negativa de did notes la palabra didn't.

Afirmativo
EJERCICIO 1 1 wanted yo quise, quería
¡1

111 Traduzca las siguientes oraciones y practique leyéndolas. you wanted quisiste
you wanted Ud. quiso
1!1'
111', l. Laugh. he wanted él quiso
1111 2. Don't laugh. she wanted ella quiso
11 3. His brother seldom laughs. it wanted quiso
11
4. His brother rarely laughs. we wanted quisimos
11 5. Does his brother often laugh? you wanted Uds. quisieron
~ 'il
! 1¡ ¡
1'
6. Doesn't his brother often Iaugh? they wanted ellos quisieron
7. His brother is going to fix the lights.
8. His brother isn't going to flx the lights. Negativo
1'
9. Is his brother going to flx the lights?
'' 1O. lsn't his brother going to fix the lights? 1 didn't want no quise, no quería
11. Helen's sister was going to go back. you didn't want no quisiste
12. Helen's sister wasn't going to go back. you didn't want Ud. no quiso
13. Was Helen's sister going to go back? he didn't want él no quiso
14. Wasn't Helen's sister going to go back? she didn't want ella no quiso
15. They have to pass by m y house. it didn 't want no quiso
16. They don't have to pass by my house. we didn't want no quisimos
17. Do they have to pass by m y house? you didn't want Uds. no quisieron
18. Don't they have to pass by my house? they didn't want ellos no quisieron
19. The boys needed money.
20. His brother laughed at me. Interrogativo
Recuerde el orden de las palabras para el interrogativo: auxiliar, sustan-
:¡:i EL PASADO DEL VERBO DO tivo o pronombre, verbo.

El pasado de las formas del verbo do es la palabra did. Did corres- did 1 want? ¿quise, quería?
did you want? ¿quisiste?
ponde al pasado de hacer cuando se usa como verbo principal. Ejemplos:
did you want? ¿quiso Ud?
'1:1

1'1,¡1'
1 did the homework. We did the homework. did he want? ¿quiso él?
1 Hice la tarea. Hicimos la tarea. did she want? ¿quiso ella?
¡:,1 111
did it want? ¿quiso?
1'11,11'11,

L 1
131
¡· ¡1 1111¡1!

i 1'11,:
130
,,
'''
,¡,1'

-~ ·'
\1\'!¡11'
1, .11:
i ¡~ll·i·ll
' ,1111

1 1

did we want? ¿quisimos? 4. Does he lmow all the lesson?

did you want? ¿quisieron Uds.? 5. The boysdon't have the same last name.
did they want? ¿quisieron ellos? 6. We don'tlike to get up eariy.
7. Those gir:s don't want a lot.
Interrogativo Negativo 8. They don't wear their hats to the movies.
9. Robert and J ohn don't eat dinner early.
didn't 1 want? ¿no quise, no quería? 1O. Mary and Alice don't think of their parents.
didn't you want? ¿no quisiste?
didn't you want? ¿no quiso Ud.?
1

1
11

.1¡
didn't he want? ¿no quiso él? EJERCICIO 5
':1 .11 didn't she want? ¿no quiso ella?
Traduzca esta; oraciones. Cámbielas al negativo, interrogativo e interro-
,·.:1 didn't it want? ¿no quiso?
1': gativo negatiw.
1

•l.' didn't we want? ¿no quisimos?

!j 11'11 didn't you want? ¿no quisieron Uds.? l. 1 workedin the office. 6. You understood the teacher.
didn 't they want? ¿no quisieron ellos? 2. He ate the bread. 7. Mr. Hunt read the lesson.
3. She wait~d for her mother. 8. Mrs. Smith put on her hat.
4. We sat in the living room. 9. Miss Carson had a new dress.
EJERCICIO 2 5. They taught English. 10. Mary looked at everything.
Práctica Verbal
if
@ l. He brought the books.
2. He didn't bring the books. EL TIEMPO PASADO DE LA EXPRESIÓN
3. Did he bring the books? IDIOMÁTICA DE NECESIDAD
4. Didn't he bring the books?
5. Why did he bring the books? El pasado de la expresión idiomática de necesidad se forma con had
6. Why didn't he bring the bÓoks? (el pasado de have), seguido de un infmitivo con la partícula to. Equi-
vale al pasado de tener que, seguido de un infinitivo. Compare el inglés
con el español.
EJERCICIO 3
Afirmativo
Práctica Verbal Repita el ejercicio 2, usando formas de los verbos an-
swer, ask, say, run, speak, go, think, sleep, know en oraciones cortas. 1 had to go. Tuve, tenía que ir.
Use un sustantivo o pronombre distinto con cada verbo. Use las pala- We had to work. Tuvimos, teníamos que trabajar.
bras interrogativas cuando sea posible.
Negativo

EJERCICIO 4 He didn't have to come. Él no tuvo, tenía que venir.

They didn't have to speak. Ellos no tuvieron, tenían que hablar.
Traduzca sstas oraciones. Cámbielas al pasado y traduzca.
l. He doesn't say the same thing. Interrogativo
'
2. Do you talk about your friend's new car? Recuerde el orden de las palabras para el interrogativo: auxiliar, sus-
3. Which boy do yo u see at the movies? tantivo o pronombre, verbo.
1',11

132 133
1

;~···.' ¡
\1
'
i
'
•
r·r'll.li,ll
1

11;1'11

111

1 11
Auxiliar
Did
Sustantivo o Pronombre
you
Verbo
have to work? 7.
8.
(to sleep) The child had
(to study) Those verbs that we had
on the hard bed.
were easy.
¿Tenías (tú) que trabajar?
9. (to read) The girls had the same lesson yesterday.
Did we have to go? 10. (to tell) Mr. Carson had the boys about his work in the
(nosotros) que ir? office.
¿Tuvimos

Interrogativo Negativo
EJERCICIO 9
Auxiliar Sustantivo o Pronombre Verbo
Traduzca estas oraciones. Cámbielas al negativo, interruyath'u e interro-
.i
l Didn't Bill have to eat? gativo negativo.
,,,·'
:11'' ¿No tenía Bill que comer?
l. They had to live in a small house.
1'1!!1,
Didn't he have to go? 2. They had to leam all the hard verbs.
¡'

1 ¿No tuvo él que ir? 3. She had to put on her green dress.
4. He had to wear his new suit.
1:1
5. 1 had to wash a lot of dresses.
EJERCICIO 6 6. We had to wake up at six o'clock.
·'1 Práctica Verbal 7. Yo u had to write a letter to your friend.
1
8. John had to go to the movies on Thursday.
,l.,,11: l. You had to go. 4. Didn't you have to go? 9. Mrs. Burns had to work every day last week.
1 ,¡'¡l 1. You didn't have to go. 5. Why did you have to go? 10. Mr. Burns had to call the children.
L ·¡,11
3. Did yo u have to go? 6. Why didn't you have to go?
li 11'¡.111'
11111
EJERCICIO 10

~.
,. '¡
EJERCICIO 7 Práctica Verbal
•11 .11[·
'¡i
Práctica Verbal Repita el ejercicio 6, usando formas de los verbos do,
' 1
come, know, finish, feel, givc en oraciones cortas. Use un sustantivo o l. He always buys bread.
pronombre distioto con cada verbo. Use las palabras interrogativas 2. He doesn't always buy bread.
llill cuando sea posible. 3. Does he always bu y bread?
4. Doesn't he always buy bread?
1•11
5. Why does he always bu y bread?
'11
\i!ll 6. He sometimes bought bread.
EJERCICIO 8 7. He didn't ever buy bread.
':'1':1
Llene los espacios con los infinitivos indicados y traduzca. 8. Did he sometimes buy bread?
1·
9. Didn't he ever buy bread?
¡'1
l. (to fmish) 1 had my work at five o'clock. 10. How much bread did he buy?
¡ji
2. (to open) He had the door every morning. 11. He's buying milk.
'1 3. (to make) She had four dresses last week. 12. He isn't buying milk.
1''.,1·11¡1:1
4. (to look for) We had the money. 13. ls he buying milk?
5. (to help) The boys had the teacher. 14. lsn't he buying milk?
1'.111¡ 6. (to turn off) My grandmother had the light at nine o'clock. 15. Where's he buying milk?
,1'¡1

:1!!1¡\! 134 135

i 1
1' 1
'1

.1

'·. 1 ;t
IJ 1
11
~f:¡l,li. . '11
1

,1¡1111 16. He was going to buy milk. 6. Do you want to buy a loaf of bread?
11111 17. He wasn't going to buy milk. 7. 1 had to get about twenty Coca-Colas for dinner.
1.
18. Was he going to buy milk? 8. Almost all the boys had to buy new shoes before they went to
1,1
19. Wasn't he going to buy milk? the United States.
l¡ 9. Didn't Mrs. Carter drink that water that was in the kitchen?
20. Where was he going to buy milk?
21. He can usually buy meat. 10. Where were you going when 1 saw you the day before yesterday?
22. He can't usually buy meat. 11. We looked for the money that you put on the table in the dining
23. Can he usually buy meat? room, but we couldn't find it.
24. Can't he usually bu y meat'! · 12. Robert didn't get up early this moming because he didn't have to
25. Where can he usually buy meat? work.
26. He liked to buy candy. 13. 1 asked the old man what happened, but he said he couldn't tell me.
11
27. He didn't like to buy candy. 14. Was the boy's saint's day on Tuesday?
,"
1

11
28. Did he like to buy candy? lS. You don't have to look for my hat because I found it in the bed-
29. Didn't he like to buy candy? room.
30. Where did he like to buy candy? 16. Miss Wells began her work at ten o'clock, but she didn't fmish be-
31. He has to buy a book. fore dinner.
32. He doesn't have to buy a book. 17. He didn't have breakfast, so he ate dinner early.
33. Does he have to buy a book? 18. You didn't have to eat that meat ifyou didn't want it.
34. Doesn't he have to bu y a book?
3S. How many books does he have to bu y? EJERCICIO 13
Escriba en inglés.
EJERCICIO 11
l. Juan dijo que no tenía que trabajar en el día de su santo.
Práctica Verbal Repita el ejercicio 10, usando formas de los verbos sell, 2. ¿Qué pasó con Juan? No sé, pero creo que está enfermo.
drink, find, begin, get, eat (have} breakfast, eat (have} dinner, eat 3. ¿No me quieres encender la luz?
1 (have} supper en oraciones cortas. Use un sustantivo o pronombre dis- 4. ¿Por qué no vino él? Dijo que hoy quería cenar con mi papá.
'1'
tinto con cada verbo y los adverbios de frecuencia cuando pueda. Use S. Si él empieza pasado mañana, puede terminar el martes.
/as palabras interrogativas what, where, how many, how much cuando 6. La Sra. Hall compró huevos, leche, un pan y mantequilla para el
'1 sea posible. desayuno.
1111 7. ¿,Qué hacías cuando te vi anteayer? Yo me estaba desayunando.
,,¡l':i!l EJERCICIO 12 8. Había unos veinticuatro muchachos que no trajeron sus libros a la
escuela.
'1111
1

,11
Lea y traduzca las siguientes oraciones. 9. Él dijo que podía venir el 16 de septiembre pero que no podía
11

i 1
traer a su esposa.
:1• 1. We bought milk and eggs for breakfast, but we didn't buy bread
10. No fui a los Estados Unidos en marzo. Fui en abril.
1
1
and butter because we forgot to take all the money .
•• 11
2. 1 bought a lot of meat in that store the day before yesterday.
1'
3. Did both boys go to the movies on Sunday aftemoon? EJERCICIO 14
.lll
•·111
4. I sold my old book for $l.SO (a dollar fifty) and bought a new Dictado
¡, l,i':¡\11'
book for $2.00 (dollars).
S. She needed more milk for the soup, but she didn't want to buy it l. ls your saint's day on the 21st of July?
1
in that store. 2. ls your birthday on the 3rd of February?
11111:
,11
11¡11

i!
11 136 137
1,'1
1

111,

•·h.¡ \'
1 11. 11:¡

·'
' ~:~~:!
',,

11

3. What's the matter with that child?

~¡···· Tirn
4. Will you do me a favor and bring me the pencil 1 put on the kitch-
en table?
5. It's almost time to begin work.
6. Both ofthese eggs are bad.
7. 1 had to say the same word five times.
8. Did you drink milk when you had breakfast?
9. He said he didn't have time to study his lesson.
10. The first lesson was easy, but the second was hard.
1 "

'·,1
EJERCICIO 15
¡ i 11 1 Conversación Conteste las siguientes preguntas.
¡¡¡
1 l. When is your saint's day?
2. When is your birthday?
\Y®@ffiiD\JDlJ<iJL?rJ® '·~--~-------""""11
1
k,
3.
4.
How old are you?
What's the matter with you? l. to leave, left dejar, dejó;
salir (de), salió (de); irse,
7. to stand up, stood up
ponerse de pie, se puso de pie
1
5. What happened to you yesterday?
¡¡1 se fue 8. all that todo lo que
!1¡
l, i
Conteste las siguientes preguntas en afirmativo y en negativo. 2. tojump,jumped saltar, 9. other, others otro, otros
saltó 10. tired cansado
11
1
1

1111'
6. Did you ask the teacher? 3. to get angry (at), 11. later más tarde
;l;l 7. Did you answer the question in English? got angry (at), 12. selfish (adj.) egoísta
8. Did he bring the eggs? enojarse (con), se 13. asleep dormido
9. Did he sometimes come on the 1st of May? enojó (con) 14. comfortable cómodo
1¡1
10. Did she always call her brother? 4. to get mad (at), got 15. chicken pollo, gallina
11. Did she usually clean the bedroom? mad (at), enojarse (con), 16. dog perro
12. Did they eat breakfast? se enojó (con) 17. cow vaca

~·f; r 13. Did John eat supper late? 5. to come back, carne back 18. bam granero
11
14. Did you finish the book? regresar, regresó (de 19. manger pesebre
'.1 15. Did you buy a lot of meat?

·l
allá para acá) 20. hay heno
16. Did you eat dinner early? 6. to lie down, lay down 21. place lugar
!l!l
: 11
17. Did they go to the movies on Sunday night? recostarse, se recostó; 22. field campo
18. Did John get up early? echarse, se echó 23. story cuento
·i
19. Did Robert give the money to the teacher?
1:d i 20. Did Mary go back to Monterrey?
21. Did Alice ever help the boys? MODISMOS
22. Did Mr. Jackson and 1 have the money?
1 :li 23. Did George and 1 know the lesson? l. Lie down. Recuéstate, Échate.
11
'!!
24. Did you and Helen laugh at me? 2. Stand up. Póngase de pie, Levántese.
:)l,, 25. Did the boys laugh at me?

138 139

i 1

~l \•
 , ,r )!~i ~ 1

' .
1
,jll¡i·l
'¡li
·.¡·11

''1
'1

1
,'.11

1,'
1'
1

1'
3. Get out of here. Vete de aquí, Lárgate de aquí.
4. Leave me alone. Déjame en paz.
5. 1 don't care. No me importa, Me es indiferente.
6. He's standing (up). Él está parado.
7. He's lying down. Él está recostado.
Nominativo

you
he
me
you
him
Objetivo
me
te, le, lo, la
le, lo
1 1

she her le, la

8. to be mad (at) estar enojado (con)
to be angry (at) estar enojado (con) it it lo, la
we us nos
9. She's mad (angry) at me. Está enojada conmigo.
you you les, los, las
they them les,los,las

EJERCICIO 1
Pronombres Objetivos Pronombres Objetivos
Traduzca las siguientes oraciones y practique leyéndolas. Usados Después de
Usados Después de

~. 1
l.
2.
Buy my supper.
Don't buy my supper. l.
Verbos
1 saw him. l.
Preposiciones
The child went with her.
3. Her brother bought my supper. 2. He helped you. 2. She looked at me.
4. Her brother didn't buy my supper. 3. They told you. 3. They spoke to us.
·1' 5. His sister had to buy my supper. 4. We asked them. 4. We talked to them.
1111111 6. His sister didn't have to buy my supper. 5. They called us. 5. He gave the money to her.
ll,lili 7. My father sold your car. 6. My sister visited her. 6. The boys laughed at him.
8. My father didn't sell your car. 7. Yo u took it. 7. Yo u looked for it.
1',','1111
9. Your sister drank a lot of milk. 8. The teacher answered me. 8. My brother waited for you.
1¡ ,,~;11\ 1O. Your sister didn't drink a lot of milk.
';¡1 l 'i
1

1 l. Did your sister drink a lot of milk?

12. Didn't your sister drink a lot ofmilk? EJERCICIO 2
] 3. When did your sister drink a lot of milk?
14. Their sister wanted a lot. Llene los espacios con la forma objetiva del pronombre entre parénte-
15. Their sister didn't want a lot. sis y traduzca.
16. Did their sister want a lot?
l. Why did you take (he) to school so late?
17. Didn't their sister want a lot? 2. The teacher read (she) a book in English, but she didn't
'l 1
18. Why didn't their sister want a lot?
r 111 understand (it) _ __
-¡: 19. Our mother had to bu y a loaf of bread.
11111
li 3. 1 gave (you) and John the money to buy the bread.
l¡ 20. Our mother didn't have to buy a loaf of bread.
1

l'¡'l 4. My brother didn't wait for (he) _ __

1: 5. Henry was going to help (they) , but he didn't have time.
,1 6. He asked (I) the time.
1,: LOS PRONOMBRES OBJETIVOS 7. My father said that he was going to buy that car for (we) _ __
8. I'm mad at (he) , and he knows (it) _ __
1,:¡ 9. Please cal! (1) on Friday.
Se colocan los pronombres objetivos después de los verbos y las pre-
111'
posiciones. Aprenda éstos y fíjese que en el nominativo y el objetivo 10. The rug was dirty, so 1 cleaned (it) _ _ _
'1¡'
111¡ son iguales los pronombres it y you. 11. The boys laughed at (she) because she sat down in the
¡
1'·
·1,'1
water.
''·¡1.,
ljl'
140 141
11¡

rl'

Li 1

-~ \:
fír. ~ ~ ~ .~
, . ¡r.!¡

' 11¡1'

1,¡'11
12. They looked at (we) when they saw (we) _ _ _ , but
they didn't speak to (we) _ __ llike Mary. 1 like her.
![!, Me gusta. (ella a mí)
13. When 1 saw {you) on the street, you were with Me gusta María.
l!j
1'
(they) _ __ 1 like you.
14. Don't give (it) to {they) ; give (it) to Me simpatizas.
(1) _ _
You like John. You like him.
15. 1 waited for (you) for twenty minutes, but you didn't (a Ud.) Le gusta Juan. Le gusta. (él a Ud.)
!¡¡ come, so 1 went with {she) - - -
He likes the house. He likes it.
1! 1
·' (a él) Le gusta la casa. Le gusta.
'11 .,·
EJERCICIO 3 She likes these boys. She likes them.
Llene los espacios con la forma objetiva del pronombre que corres- (a ella) Le simpatizan estos Le simpatizan (a ella)
J\ ponde al sustantivo entre paréntesis y traduzca. muchachos.
1
Ejemplo: He visits {his aunt) every week. He visits her every week. He likes those girls. He likes them.
1
(a él) Le gustan esas Le gustan (a él)
l. 1 can see (my mother) in the garden. muchachas.
2. He couldn't find (my sister) at the movies. We like these dogs. We like them.
3. John fiXed (the car) and put {the car) _ __ Nos gustan estos perros. Nos gustan.
in the garage.
4. 1 saw (my uncle) yesterday. You like the teachers. You like them.
5. We bought {the chairs) for $25.00 (dollars). (a Uds.) Les simpatizan Les simpatizan (a Uds.)
6. Mrs. Carter gave (John) a new hat. los profesores.
7. They looked at (Henry) and {Alice) _ __ They like Mexico. They like it.
8. I answered {the teacher) in Spanish. (a ellos, ellas) Les gusta Les gusta (a ellos, ellas)
9. Mary gave {the books) to the boys. México.
10. 1 told (the boys) that 1 was mad. They like yo u and Mary. They like you.
11. Please don't talk to (J ohn and me) now. (a ellos, ellas) Les gusta Les gustan. {Uds. a ellos,
l. 12. If you want to wait for (m y father and me) , we can go Ud. y María. ellas)
¡11'1 with you.
u 13. Mr. Smith put (the cow and the dog)
14. He got mad at (John)
in the barn.
, nut at (Alice) _ __
:¡¡ EJERCICIO 4
15. What are the girls going todo with (that dirty dress) ?
ll'l!r¡
Llene los espacios con la forma objetiva del pronombre que corres-
ponde al sustantivo entre paréntesis y traduzca.
LIKE CON LOS SUSTANTIVOS l. 1 like ( this girl) a lo t.
y PRONOMBRES OBJETIVOS 2. Do you like {the house) ?
11'
3. He says that he likes (John) _ __
El verbo like se conjuga en inglés como cualquier otro verbo. Cuando 4. 1 know that he's going to like {the girls) _ __
no está seguido de una forma verbal, lo estará por un sustantivo o pro- 5. The teacher likes (you and me) _ __
'111 nombre objetivo que se referirá a un sustantivo ya mencionado o sobre- 6. Helen said that she liked (Paul and you) _ __
,¡1'1111
entendido. Estudie los ejemplos. 7. Does he like (his new shoes) _ _ _ ?
''i,ll
.

142 143

11
~~~ 1'¡l!,!,l
111''
1),,
,, Don't answer. No contestes, No conteste.
8. Did you like (that story) ?
1'1,! 9. Do they like (m y sister) ? Don't let him answer. Que no conteste él, No lo dejes
1 ,'1 10. They aren't going to like (these books) _ __ contestar.
11. They don't have to like (Peter and me) - - - . Don't let John answer. Que no conteste Juan, No deje
1
12. Bill is going to like (your uncle) a lo t. que Juan conteste.
13. Is he going to like (my aunt) too?
14. Do you like (my new car) ? Don't let her answer. Que no conteste ella, No deje
15. Do they like (the United States) ? que ella conteste.
Don't let Mary answer. Que no conteste María, No deje
que María conteste.
1 1
EL IMPERATIVO Don't Jet us answer. No nos deje contestar.
,',f
Como ya sabe, se forma el imperativo de la segunda persona singular Let's not answer. No contestemos, No vayamos a contestar.
r¡ y plural you (tú, Ud., Uds.) con el infmitivo sin la partícula to, supri- Don 't answer. No contesten (Uds.).
1,1
miendo el pronombre. Don't let them answer.
11
El imperativo con todas las otras personas se forma con la palabra Que no contesten ellos (ellas),
let, seguida del pronombre objetivo o sustantivo y el infinitivo del verbo No los (las) deje que contesten.
empleado sin la partícula to. Estudie los siguientes ejemplos y fíjese en Don 't let the boys answer. Que no contesten los muchachos,
las dos formas de la primera persona plural (Jet us y let's) y sus traduc- No deje que los muchachos
ciones correspondientes. contesten.

Let me answer. Que conteste yo, Déjeme contestar.

11¡1,1!! Answer. Contesta (tú), Conteste (Ud.) . EJERCICIO 5
.11'
Let him answer. Que conteste él, Déjelo contestar. Traduzca las siguientes oraciones.
1¡, 1

,1¡¡11 Let John answer. Que conteste Juan, Deje que l. Déjela venir. 17. Dejen que vengan mis padres.
Juan conteste. 2. No me deje venir. 18. No dejen que vengan mis padres.
l,il' Let her answer. Que conteste ella, Déjela contestar. 3. Que venga él. 19. Déjeme comer.
4. No lo deje venir.
~,
1

Let Mary answer. Que conteste María, Deje que 20. No me deje comer.
5. Deje venir a mi hermana.
1

1' 1 1

María conteste. 21. Que coma él.

6. No deje que venga mi hermana. 22. Que no coma él.
Let us answer. Déjenos contestar. 7. Déjela venir. 23. Deje que el perro coma.
Let's answer. Contestew;:,s, Vamos a contesta:. 8. No la deje venir. 24. No deje que el perro coma.
1 9. Dejen que venga nuestra hermana. 25. Déjenla comer.
1
Answer. Contesten (Uds.) 10. No dejen que nuestra hermana venga. 26. No la dejen comer.
1,1,, Let them answer. Que contesten ellos (ellas), 11. Vengamos temprano. 27. Vamos a comer (comamos).
1'1' Déjelos(las) contestar. 12. No vengamos temprano. 28. No comamos.
11
!11
1 Let the boys answer. Que contesten los muchachos, 13. Déjenos venir. 29. Déjenos comer.
,, 11¡
Deje que contesten los muchachos. 14. No nos deje venir. 30. No nos deje comer.
1

1'1, 15. Que vengan ellos. 31. No los deje comer.

;. ,j¡,,llll
Don't Jet me answer. Que no conteste yo, No me deje 16. Que no vengan ellos.
~oPtestar.
,¡,'1,
145
1'

' ', IL'

1
;
¡:

\
i
144
1

~~~
' 'fl'¡l¡''
" ll/
1
1
1

,¡1 , ', 1 i

EL USO DEL GERUNDIO 18. ls there a school (cerca de) your house?
CON PREPOSICIONES 19. The bam isn't very (lejos de) the house.
1'
20. lfyou stand (detrás de) him, they can't see you.
Se usa en castellano un infinitivo después de las preposiciones. En 21. (además de comprar) this green pencil, 1 bought a red
inglés es preciso usar el gerundio (la forma ing del verbo). Fíjese: book.
antes de ir 22. Come over here and sit (al lado de) me.
before going 23. (además de) getting up early, 1 have to work late at night.
without going sin ir
después de venir 24. Put your hat (aliado de) Mary's books.
after coming 25. She lay down for an hour (antes de lavar) the curtains.
besides coming además de venir

Aprenda las siguientes preposiciones.

EJERCICIO 7
'¡¡ti beside al lado de behind detrás de
near cerca de Práctica verbal
besides además de
far from lejos de next to junto a
l. They always come back late.
in front of delante de, 2. They don't always come back late.
enfrente de 3. Do they always come back late?
4. Don't they always come back late?
5. Why do they always come back late?
i,¡lll EJERCICIO 6
,'1!1¡ 1
6. They often carne back late.
¡,1¡
:11· Llene los espacios con la preposición correcta y traduzca. 7. They didn't often come back late.
8. Did they often come back late?
1
l. My uncle sat (al lado de) my father at the movies. 9. Didn't they often come back late?
li¡
2. My uncle sat (junto a) my father at the movies.
1

10. Why did they often come back late?

1

illl 3. My uncle sat (delante de) my father at the movies. 11. They're going to come back soon.
4. My uncle sat (lejos de) my father at the movies. 12. They aren't going to come back soon.
1¡¡1 5. My uncle sat (cerca de) my father at the movies. 13. Are they going to come back soon?
,1 . 6. My uncle sat (detrás de) my father at the movies. 14. Aren't they going to come back soon?
7. (además de trabajar) in an office, 1 teach English. 15. Why aren't they going to come back soon?
8. Henry was standing (enfrente de) ___ the house when yo u 16. They were going to come back soon.
1'
1
carne. 17. They weren 't going to come back soon.
1li 1

9. Mary doesn't like to sit (cerca de) the window because it's 18. Were they going to come back soon?
',¡1,
cold. 19. Weren't they going to come back soon?
\¡,''¡1
10. He saw your shoes (detrás de) the sofa. 20. What time were they going to come back?
11','1:
11. (además de) chicken, 1 ate candy. 21. They could come back on Tuesday.
12. (después de comer) we went to school. 22. They couldn't come back on Tuesday.
13. We live (lejos de) Mexico City. 23. Cou1d they come back on Tuesday?
14. ls Cuemavaca (lejos de) Mexico City? 24. Couldn't they come back on Tuesday?
15. Please don't stand (aliado de) me. 25. What time could they come back on Tuesday?
16. ls that your car (enfrente de) the office?
1

26. They want to come back before six.

,ll' i ¡ .17. Why are you standing (detrás de) · all those people? 27. They don't want to come back before six.
1

146 147

~~\
 ~ ' '1· .!,·':1
1
'
1 :,,!1:

!l
11[1
.
·111

11::!

1;' 1

,1: 1
28. Do they want to come back befare six? EJERCICIO 10
' .¡, 29. Don 't they want to come back befo re six?
,11 Escriba en inglés.
1

!
30. Why don't they want to come back befare six?
31. They had to come back last night. l. ¿Me quieres hacer un favor? Con mucho gusto. ¿Qué puedo hacer?
32. They didn't have to come back last night. 2. Cuando el profesor dijo -Levántense- todos los muchachos se
33. Did they have to come back last night? levantaron.
34. Didn't they have to come back last night?
35. Why didn't they have to come back last night? 3. Antes de recostarme, voy a leer como una hora.
4. Vete de aquí y déjame en paz.
-~

5. No me importa. Voy a regresar el lunes.

6. Él se puso tan furioso con aquel perro que quería venderlo.
EJERCICIO 8 7. Recuéstate en el piso. No hay lugar en la cama.
8. Ellos tienen toda clase de zapatos aquí. ¿Qué clase va a comprar
Práctica Verbal Repita el ejercicio 7, usando formas de los verbos Ud.?
1¡'1
:¡ leave, jump, get angry {at), get mad (at), be angry (at), be mad {at),
9. Regresemos temprano porque estoy muy cansado.
come back, Jie down, stand up en oraciones cortas. Use un sustantivo o
,1
10. Lo siento, pero no me puedo sentar junto a Ud. cuando comamos
pronombre distinto con cada verbo. Use los adverbios de frecuencia y hoy.
,, las palabras interrogativas when y what time cuando sea posible.
11. Después de ir al cine, tomamos nuestra merienda.
1';

EJERCICIO 9 EJERCICIO 11
Lea y traduzca. Dictado

THE DOG IN THE MANGER
One warm day a dog was looking for a comfortable place to sleep.
He looked in the barn and saw sorne hay in a cow's manger.
1
l. I said, "Get out of the house and go to work."
2. Don't get mad at me.
3. Did you leave your car in front ofmy house last night?
4. Why did he have to come back on Wednesday?
5. He was so sick that he had to lie down.

11

'! The dog knew that the hay was the cow's supper; but he jumped 6. Sorne of the boys stood up, and the others sat down.
into (al) the manger, lay down on the hay, and was soon asleep. 7. Did he le ave the other book here forme?
Sometime later the cow, tired and hungry, carne back from the field 8. Yes, he left it on the table in the living room.
1'
'1
where she had to work all day. She was thinking of the good supper 9. Besides putting hay in the barn for the cow, 1 had to give the dog
she was going to find in the manger; but when she saw the dog lying his meat.
' ¡·1'1
''1' on the hay, she didn't know what to do. 10. Is the field far from here? No, it's behind the barn.
t.'.; 1
'f ' 1

"Wake up," the cow said to the dog. "I worked all day, and I'm
J very hungry. Let me eat my supper."
The dog got angry because the cow woke him up. He stood up in EJERCICIO 12
ij ¡
1 the manger and said to the cow, "Get out of he re and leave me alone. Conversación Conteste las siguientes preguntas.
J
1 don't care if this is your hay. I'm going to sleep here."
~;;., The cow said, "You can't eat my hay, and you don't want meto l. When is your saint's day?
,f eat it. Why don't you let others have what you can't use? You're very 2. When is your birthday?
selfish." 3. How old are you?

1'ji
r
148 149

,,\
 1
"11,1 1.1

1
,1111
11
111 1,,

. 11,111 i
11
1
1

¡l
,'1\1 !

4. What's your name?

11 '1 5. What time is it?

~ci•••• TIV
11:'· 1

!
Conteste las siguientes preguntas en el afirmativo y en el negativo.
6. ls the barn behind the house? 1
7. Is the house far from the barn?
8. Is the car in front of the house? "
9. ls the store next to the house?
10. Is the store beside the house?
11. Is the store near the house?
1 1
12. Did you sit next to John?
1 IJI' i 13. Did you sit beside John?
14. Did you sit in front of John?
1,1111111
15. Did you sit far from John?
16. Did you sit behind John?
';\
17. Did yo u sit near 1ohn?
18. Did you have two more books besides these?
.,,!,1
',¡
19. Did the dogjump into (al) the cow's manger?
20. Did the dog lie down?
21. Do you ever get angry?
r\Y®@ro~rnilruiTfi®--------------------~
1
l. to invite, invited invitar,
invitó
8.
9.
tall (estatura) alto
long largo
1
,,111!
', 1'
1
22. Do you ever get mad? 2. to meet, met encontrar(se), 10. interesting interesante
' 11 1

1
23. Do you like to stand up? se encontró (personas por 11. fox zorro
'11
11''1 24. Do you want to sit down? casualidad); conocer, conoció 12. stork cigüeña
25. Do yo u want to lie down? (personas por primera vez) 13. plate plato
1¡,111111
26. Do you like him? 3. to set, set colocar, colocó 14. glass vaso; vidrio; cristal
!1,1'1111
27. Does he like her? 4. to hear, heard oír, oyó 15. mouth boca; pico; hocico
1
28. Do you like them? 5. to reply, replied contestar, 16. bill pico
,
11
•• 1 29. Does she like it? contestó 17. knife cuchillo
j¡ 30. Did you like her very much? 6. shallow poco profundo; 18. knives cuchillos
1' 31. Did he like it? extendido 19. fork tenedor
1 ¡! 32. Did your mother like him? 7. narrow estrecho 20. spoon cuchara
1' ¡, 33. Did she like the curtains?
' ·11 34. Did Bob's sister like the movies? MODISMOS
;·¡ il.l
~1 1 1 11
35. Did yo u like the United States?
. 111
.1,
36. Was there a lot oftime? l. to set the table, set the table poner la mesa
i~~ i 1

11
37. Weren't there a lot of chickens? 2. Come in. Pase Ud. (de allá para acá)
i}! ¡ll
.¡¡ 38. ls there going to be a lot of water?

lt Go in. Pase Uq.(ge ac;ápara allá)

11

39. ls it going to be cold? 3. That's all right. N9 tenga euidado.

,,
:11111
111
40. Are you going to be thirty-six in October? 4. It doéSn't matter. No le hace, No importa.
.k 1 1'11
It doesn't make any difference. No le hace, No importa.
~ 111'
'l' 1
''1 11 5 . as far as 1 know que yo sepa
,¡',1.1
·.
1 1
1

,¡
1

11¡1'1
,·111.
150 151
~.; 1
111 1

11 1.,

¡. 1
"' 1'

'1'1'

L' ~ ~
'
; . 111

•·l~''illl
''fi~ '1¡1111.!11

i 1 ¡~ '.1
1 1

'1 ¡1
6. a little (milk) un poco (de leche) mine el mío, la mía, los míos, las mías
a few (men) unos cuantos, unos pocos (hombres) yours el tuyo, la tuya, los tuyos, las tuyas
7. to say good-bye (to) despedirse (de) yours (de Ud.) el suyo, la suya, los suyos, las suyas
He said good-bye (to her). Se despidió (de ella). his (de él) el suyo, la suya, los suyos, las suyas
8. to get to llegar a hers (de ella) el suyo, la suya, los suyos, las suyas
He got to Mexico at six. Llegó a México a las seis. ours el nuestro, la nuestra, los nuestros, las nuestras
to get here (there) llegar yours (de Uds.) el suyo, la suya, los suyos, las suyas
He got here (there) early. Llegó temprano. theirs (de ellos, ellas) el suyo, la suya, los suyos, las suyas
(Cuando no se indica el lugar a donde se llega, se debe emplear here
1
o there, según el caso.) EJERCICIO 2
1 ¡..
:fll
·1.1
Llene los espacios con el pronombre posesivo que corresponde a las pa-
labras entre paréntesis y traduzca.
EJERCICIO 1
11111'1
Traduzca estas oraciones y practique leyéndolas. l. Henry forgot his hat, so he wore (my hat) _ __
2. She has (her book) _ _ _ . Why don't you have (your
l. Stand up. book) ?
2. Don't stand up. 3. John found his money, but George can't find (his money) _ __
3. Let me lie down. 4. Alice has her English lesson in the morning, but we have (our
4. Don't let me lie-down. lesson) in the afternoon.
",11 '·.1
'1 ,11'¡i
5. Let him lie down. 5. 1 gave the money to Mr. Smith because it's (his money) _ __
,11
6. Don't let him lie down. 6. This book isn't (my book) . lt's (her book) _ __
,1'
7. Let her lie down. 7. 1 saw my mother at the movies, but 1 didn't see (his
111. '' 1¡,
¡.'.11!
8. Don't let her lie down. mother) _ _ _ .
9. Let's lie down. 8. My car is in the garage. Can we go in (your car) ?
·'111,!;1
10. Let's not lie down. 9. That isn't our car. (our car) is green.
1!
11. Let us lie down. 10. lfyou can't find your pencil, the girls can give you (their
1 1' 12. Don't let us lie down. pencil) _ __
!1•
', 1
13. Let them lie down. 11. This knife isn 't (m y knife) . lt's (his knife) _ __
14. Don't let them lie down. 12. 1 work in my office, and he works in (his office) _ __
15. Mr. Flint often gets mad. 13. 1 don't want toread this book. 1 want toread (her book) _ __
16. Mr. Flint doesn't often get mad. 14. 1 have your book, and you have (my book) _ __
1
17. Does Mr. Flint often get mad? 15. lf 1 can't find my pencil, I'm going to take (their pencil) _ __
i ¡' 18. Doesn't Mr. Flint often get mad?
i ¡
16. This book isn't (your book) . It's (their book) _ __
1
19. Mr. Flint got mad at me. 17. She's going to wash her dress. Are you going to wash (your dress)
20. Mr. Flint didn't get mad at me. _ _ _ too?
1¡11'1
' 1 18. My children are in the garden, but 1 don't see (your
,' ¡'
children) _ __
LOS PRONOMBRES POSESIVOS 19. I'm going to ask him if he can f!X (my radio) . Do you
11\11 think he can fiX (your radio) too?
,1 11111¡
1
Aprenda los pronombres posesivos. No se usa el art/culo antes de los 20. 1 turned off all my lights, but 1 didn't turn off (your
pronombres posesivos. lights) _ __
¡ 1¡111
1 :, 1

¡
111'1

1¡:¡!
152 153
, 1 ,¡~1'
1 1 ·,,,

'1 MUCH y MANY, LITTLE y FEW 18. He didn't go to the movies because there were so (many, much)
_ _ _ people there.
Aprenda estas palabras. 19. We did so (many much) work today that I'm very tired.
Singular Plural 20. A (little, few) of the girls wanted to go to the movies,
but (many, much) others wanted to go to Mary's house.
much mucho many muchos
little poco few pocos
TOSA Y y TO TELL
Se usan las palabras much (mucho) y little (poco) antes de los sus-
tantivos en singular. Many (muchos) y few (pocos) se usan antes de los Se traducen los infinitivos to say y to tell por decir, pero hay alguna
sustantivos en plural. Recuerde e1 uso de los modrsmos too much, too diferencia en el uso de los dos.
many (pág. 41) y so much, so many (pág. 51). Generalmente se usan formas del verbo tell cuando sigue un pronom-
:11 bre o un sustantivo o pronombre objetivo. Cuando éstos no siguen, se
usan formas del verbo say. Si el verbo va seguido de una preposición,
EJERCICIO 3 también se usan formas del verbo say. Cuando uno vaya a citar las pala-
Llene los espacios con much, many o little, few. bras exactas de una persona, se usa el verbo say solo o seguido de una
frase con la preposición to. Estudie los ejemplos.
l. We don't have (much, many) time.
l. 1 told him that 1 was going to put the book on the table.
2. How (much, many) money do you have?
2. He said, "l'm fine."
3. How (much, many) children do you have?
,,i 3. He said tome, "I'm fine."
1
4. There isn't (much, many) water in the kitchen.
4. She says that she can't go.
5. There are (much, many) books on the table.
'1:' 5. Did he tell John that he is sick?
6. Puta (little, few) more milk in my glass.
7. Only a (little, few) men worked yesterday.
111 8. There were so (little, few) clean knives and forks in the EJERCICIO 4
kitchen that my wife couldn't set the table. Llene los espacios con la forma correcta de los verbos tell y say y tra-
9. Of course, my husband is going to give you a (litt1e, few) _ _ __
1

duzca.
more time.
10. That school is very big, but they have (little, few) _ _ __ l. What did he ____ you?
teachers. 2. He that he was going to study.
11. 1 carne to buy sorne books. How (much, many) do you 3. Why did Mary that?
11 have? 4. When they carne in, they , "Good morning."
! 12. 1 can't sleep well at night if I eat too (many, much) _ __ 5. What are yo u going your mother?
13. We're going to the United States in a (little, few) days. 6. Are you going her that you're sick?
14. My husband has a (little, few) old suits that he can give 7. No, I'm not going my mother that I'm sick.
yo u. 8. Why did you me that?
15. Sorne of the boys were speaking English, but (much, many) 9. We Mary and Alice everything.
_ _ _ of them were speaking Spanish. 10. Don't me.
16. There was only a (little, few) hay in the bam for the 11. He that he was going my father, but he didn't
cows. _ _ _ him.
17. Sorne day, when 1 have only a (little, few) work, I'm 12. 1 didn't that 1 didn't want to go. 1 that 1
going to finish that book. couldn't go.

154 155
1

1!

: 1
'¡¡
., 11 ,l

11
~'! 111

13. 1 don't know why you that. 13. Henry is going with me (hasta) New York.
14. When 1 see them, l'm going them what you said. 14. Good-bye (hasta) Tuesday.
15. What did he _ _ _ you? He us that it was time to eat. 15. Please don 't turn on the light (de arriba de) my be d.
16. 1 don't want John that he can't go. 16. J ohn put his hat (encima de) the letter.
17. She only that we needed a telephone. 17. I'm going to wash the wall (debajo de) _ _ _ the window.
18. Didn't you us that your name was Robert? 18. My book is {debajo de) yours.
19. We couldn't hear what the teacher was _ __ 19. She lives two floors {abajo de) him.
20. What did you ? 20. l'm going to put my book {debajo de) yours.
21. Helen walked with them {hasta) the store.
22. The wall (arriba de) that chair is dirty.
PREPOSICIONES 23. We live (en) 256 Water Street.
!·1 24. The water ran all (por) the floor on Friday afternoon.
Aprenda estas preposiciones. 25. She said there was aman (debajo de) her be d.
until hasta (empleado con tiempo)
as far as hasta (empleado con distancia)
EJERCICIO 6
above arriba, (de) arriba de
over directamente encima de Practica Verbal
below abajo, debajo de
l. We invite her.
under directamente debajo de
2. We don't invite her.
close cerca
3. Do we invite her?
close to cerca de
4. Don't we invite her?
near cerca, cerca de
5. Why don't we invite her?
toward hacia 6. We invited you.
all over por todo
7. We didn't invite you.
8. Did we invite you?
9. Didn't we invite you?
EJERCICIO 5
10. Why didn't we invite you?
Llene los espacios con la preposición correcta y traduzca. 11. We're inviting them.
12. We aren 't inviting them.
l. 1 waited for you (hasta) four o'clock, but you didn't come 13. Are we inviting them?
2. Put your chair (cerca de) mine. 14. Aren't we inviting them?
3. They walked (hacia) the city. 15. Why are we inviting them?
4. The light (de arriba de) the table isn't very good. 16. We were going to invite him.
5. Mr. Rogers lives (abajo de) me on the third floor. 17. We weren't going to invite him.
6. We sat very (cerca de) the teacher, but we couldn't hear.
18. Were we going to invite him?
7. l'm not going to go (hasta) tomorrow. 19. Weren't we going to invite him?
8. They could see the city (abajo de) them. 20. Why weren't we going to invite him?
9. (que yo sepa) 1 know, he didn't work yesterday. 21. We can invite the girls.
10. Mother put the picture on the wall (arriba de) ____ the sofa. 22. We can't invite the girls.
11. Fred found his shoes (debajo de) the be d. 23. Can we invite the girls?
12. That dog carne (hacia) me, and 1 was afraid. 24. Can't we invite the girls?
'1¡

156 157

'1
1
, 1 ll'
1 1

1 '

25. Why can't we invite the girls? The fox went into the kitchen and carne back with the soup. He put
26. We like to invite Mary. sorne soup in each plate and began to eat.
27. We don't like to invite Mary. The stork couldn't drink the soup from the shallow plate with her
28. Do we like to invite Mary? long bill, so she was hungry all afternoor..
29. Don't we like to invite Mary? When the stork said good-bye to the fox, the fox said, "You didn't
30. When do we like to invite Mary? eat very much. l'm sorry that you didn't like the soup."
31. We have to invite Bob (Beta). "That's all right," answered the stork. "It doesn't matter. It was a
32. We don't have to invite Bob. very interesting day, and I want you to come to m y house next Sun-
33. Do we have to invite Bob? day afternoon and have dinner with me."
34. Don't we have to invite Bob? The next Sunday the fox got to the stork's house at twelve o'clock.
35. Why do we have to invite Bob? When the stork opened the door, she said, "Come in and sit down at
11
the table. Dinner is ready."
Then she set two tall, narrow glasses on the table, put sorne soup in
EJERCICIO 7
each glass, and set one of the glasses in front of the fox.
Práctica Verbal Repita el ejercicio 6, usando formas de los verbos meet, The stork put her long bill in the tall glass and drank and drank, but
set, set the table, reply, hear, get to, get here (there), say good -bye (to) the fox couldn't put his big mouth in the narrow glass, so he was hun-
en oraciones cortas. Use un sustantivo o pronombre distinto con cada gry all afternoon.
verbo. Use las palabras interrogativas where y when cuando sea posible. When the fox said good-bye, the stork said, "1 see that you ate very
little so u p. Do you want to hear that l'm sorry (cuánto lo siento)?"

EJERCICIO 8
Lea y traduzca. EJERCICIO 9
Escriba en inglés.

THE FOX ANO THE STORK l. Llegué antes que Ud.

2. Por supuesto, este libro es mío.
One day a fox met his friend, the stork. After they talked for a few 3. Lo conocí a él en Acapulco el año pasado.
minutes, the fox asked the stork if she could come to his house on 4. ¿Por qué no me dijo que iba a Estados Unidos dentro de (in) unos
Sunday. pocos días?
"Certainly ," replied the stork. "1 can get there befare twelve o'clock." 5. Había poca gente en la calle ayer.
"Good," said the fox. "l'm going to invite you to have dinner with 6. ¿No quieres comer un poco?
me." 7. No llevemos mucho dinero con nosotros.
On Sunday morning the stork went to the fox's house. When she got 8. Claro que no importa si él regresa.
there, the fox was setting the table. 9. Cuando llegamos a la puerta, él dijo -Pase.
"Come in," said the fox, "and sit down. Dinner is almost ready. 10. Que yo sepa, él no estaba usando el teléfono.
We're going to eat in a few minutes."
The fox put sorne flowers in a vase and set the vase on the table.
EJERCICIO 10
Then he put two shallow plates on the table; and beside each plate
he puta knife, a fork, anda spoon. Dictado
"Now," said the fox, "put your chair close to the table. It's time to
l. Mother is setting the table for breakfast. lt's time to eat.
eat, and dinner is ready. I'm going to bring the soup from the
kitchen." 2. We got to school at eight-thirty, but we were late.

158 159

1 ':1
i 11
., 1111¡1

1 1,'

3. Did you meet her in Taxco last week?

4. Don't put that spoon in your mouth because it's dirty.
5. Let's not go to the movies tonight. Let's read this interesting book. -~ l1ITJ
6. lfhe doesn't have too much todo, let him help us.
7. Stand u p. 1 want tose e if your dress is too long.
8. Mary doesn't like to live on this narrow street.
~lttll Ul!J
9. lfyou get home on Saturday, cometo see me in the afternoon.
10. 1 know you can't bring the book on Wednesday, but that's all right.

EJERCICIO 11
Conversación Conteste las siguientes preguntas.

l. When is your saint's day?

2. When is your birthday?
3. What time is it?
4. How old are you? r" \:/®@ffilbrnDffiL?~® -"~-·--~·~·
5. Where do you live? ! l. to lose, lost perder, perdió 8. turtle tortuga
6. Who set the table? j 2. to win, won ganar, ganó 9. animal animal
7. What time did you get to the office? ~ (de jugar) 10. race carrera; raza
8. What time did yo u get home? ( 3. tostar~, started empezar, 11 . grass pasto
9. When did yo u get here? ¡ empezo 12. tree árbol
10. When can you get there? l 4. to el ose, closed cerrar, 13. eye ojo
Conteste las siguientes preguntas en el afirmativo y en el negativo.
1
¡ cerró 14. cup taza
! 5. to stop, stopped detenerse, 15. saucer plato (de taza)
11. Are there many teachers in the school? se detuvo 16. cake pastel
12. ls there always money in the house? 6. to listen ( to), Iistened ( to) 17. coffee café
13. ls there water in the glass? escuchar, escuchó 18. apple manzana
14. Do you ever go to the movies on Monday? 7. rabbit conejo
15. Do you ever visit Mary on Sunday?
16. Do you ever get up at six o'clock?
17. Do yo u ever get to the office early? MODISMOS
1

18. Do you often go to the movies on Saturday?

1 1

! 19. Do yo u usually go to the movies on Sunday? l. to go to sleep dormirse

20. Did he reply in English? 2. to go to bed acostarse, irse a la cama
21. Did she set the glasses on the table? 3. to get sleepy entrar! e a uno sueño, darle a uno sueño
22. Did she invite you to eat with her? 4. after a while después de un rato
23. Did he meet you at the movies? 5. What color is it? ¿De qué color es?
24. Did he get there at twenty minutes after nine? It's blue. Es azul.
25. Did they watch TV a lot? 6. He went out of town. Él salió de la ciudad.
He's out of town. Él está fuera de la ciudad.
He was out of town. Él estaba fuera de la ciudad.

160 161
1

¡,1

'l¡;i,l
f 11111

7. He started borne. Él salió para su casa. SOME

8. 1 listened to the radio. Oí el radio.
Se emplea la palabra sorne como adjetivo o pronombre cuando el
verbo y el sentido de la oración son afirmativos. Como adjetivo, sorne
EJERCICIO 1 siempre va acompañado de sustantivo, y como pronombre, siempre se
refiere a algo ya mencionado o sobreentendido. Estudie las siguientes
Traduzca las siguientes oraciones y practique leyéndolas.
oraciones:
l. Jump over him {bríncalo ). (verbo afirmativo y l. He has sorne Él tiene algunos
2. Don't jump over him. sentido afirmativo) books. libros.
3. Let's jump over it.
4. Let's not jump over it. (verbo afirmativo y 2. He has sorne. Él tiene algunos.
5. Let him jump over the fence. sentido afim1ativo)
6. Don't let him jump over the fence. (verbo afirmativo y 3. He wants Él quiere café.
¡
i ',
!1
7. Let them jump over me. sentido afirmativo) sorne coffee.
8. Don't let them jump over me. (verbo afirmativo y 4. He wants Él quiere.
9. Those men hear you. sentido afirmativo) sorne.
10. Those men don't hear you.
11. Do those men hear you? (verbo afirmativo y 5. Sorne of the Algunos de los
12. Don't those men hear you? sentido afirmativo) boys carne. muchachos
vinieron.
1

13. These women met me yesterday.

14. These women didn't meet me yesterday.
15. Did these women meet me yesterday?
16. Didn't these women meet me yesterday? ANY y NOT ... ANY

f 17.
18.
19.
That girl is going to lie down.
That girl isn't going to lie down.
Is that girl going to lie down?
Se emplea la palabra any como adjetivo o pronombre cuando el
verbo está en negativo o cuando la oración está en interrogativo. Como
adjetivo, any siempre va acompañado de un sustantivo, y como pro-
20. Isn't that girl going to lie down?
nombre, siempre se refiere a algo ya mencionado o sobreentenido.
Acuérdese Ud. que el inglés no permite doble negación y fíjese en las
LOS PRONOMBRES y ADJETIVOS traducciones de los ejemplos.
INDEFINIDOS SOME, ANY, NO, NONE (verbo negativo) l. He doesn't Él no tiene
have any book. ningún libro.
sorne algún; alguno(s) (verbo negativo) 2. He doesn 't Él no tiene.
any algún; alguno(s) have any.
not ... any no; ninguno; ningún
no no; ningún (verbo negativo) 3. He doesn 't El no quiere
none ninguno want any coffee. café.
(verbo negativo) 4. He doesn't Él no quiere.
El empleo de estas palabras en inglés es en varias ocasiones idiomá- want any.
tico, y por lo tanto muchas veces no se puede traducir. Es preciso siem-
pre tener presente, tanto en el estudio de estas palabras como en las (oración interrogativa) 5. Does he ha ve ·¿Tiene algunos
siguientes, que el inglés no permite doble negación. any books? libros?
1 '

162 163

1~1
 ....
~----------------------- --------

~ '1 11!

' 1 il

(oración interrogativa) 6. Does he ha ve any? ¿Tiene algunos? (verbo afirmativo y 3. He wants no coffee. Él no quiere
7. Doesn 't he ¿No quiere café? sentido negativo) (He doesn't café.
(oración interrogativa)
want any coffee? want any coffee.)
(verbo afirmativo y 4. He wants none. Él no quiere.
(oración interrogativa) 8. Doesn 't he ¿No quiere?
sentido negativo) (He doesn't
wantany?
want any.)
(verbo afirmativo y 5. None of the Ninguno de los
sentido negativo) boys carne. muchachos vino.
EJERCICIO 2
Llene los espacios con any o sorne y traduzca.
1 EJERCICIO 3
1
,.¡11:
l. ls there _____ bread in the kitchen?
i,::,
' ' 2. Yes, there's bread in the kitchen. Llene los espacios con no o none y traduzca.

1
1

3. No, there isn't _ _ _ bread in the kitchen. l. He says he has book.

4. l'm going to buy for dinner. 2. Did he say he has _ _ _ ?
k~ 5. Do yo u see people on the street? 3. No, he says he has _ __
i 6. Yes, 1 see ____ 4. Did he say he had pencil?
1

7. No, 1 don't see ____ 5. No, he said he had book.

8. Did they give yo u money? 6. We have books.
9. No, they didn't give me ____ money. 7. How much money do you have? 1 have _ __
10. Yes, they gave us _ __ 8. How much money do you have? 1 have money.
9. How much time do yo u have? 1 have _ __
10. How much time do you have? 1 have ____ time.
NO y NONE
EJERCICIO 4
Se emplean las palabras no y none cuando el verbo está en afirma- Llene los espacios con any, sorne, no, none y traduzca.
tivo, pero el sentido de la oración es negativo. Siendo un adjetivo no,
siempre irá acompañado de un sustantivo; y siendo none un pronombre, l. Did you see ____ Americans?
no llevará ningún sustantivo, sino que se referirá a algo ya mencionado 2. No, 1 didn't see _ __
¡ll'll o sobreentendido. Las palabras no y none equivalen a not. .. any; la 3. 1 saw in Acapulco. (afinnativo)
i ¡1 1 ' i~ correlación not ... any es mucho más usual. 4. Didn't you see in the Hotel del Prado?
1

ili Recuerde Ud. que el inglés no permite doble negación y fíjese en las 5. No, 1 didn't see ____ in the Hotel del Prado, but 1 saw
traducciones de los ejemplos. on the street.
6. 1 saw Americans. (negativo)
1
(verbo afirmativo y 1 . He has no book. Él no tiene 7. No, 1 saw _ __
1 il sentido negativo) (He doesn't ningún libro. 8. Do you have children?
11
'¡,
11
have any book.) 9. No,wehave _ __
(verbo afirmativo y 2. He has none. Él no tiene. 10. No, we have children.
11.
'1' sentido negativo) (He doesn't 11. Yes, we have children.
¡1 11'

• 1:11
1¡'!
1
have any.) 12. No, we don't have children, but they have _ __
1

:,11
¡';1

1
,¡
164 165
!!
11¡,

'i'[

ttl.~
1

,; .¡1il[
,;¡'1
 r 'J !:r~
1 i

13. They have children (afinnatiFo), but we have _ __ (verbo afirmativo y 5. Nothing happened. No pasó nada.
14. We have children (negatiFo), but they have _ __ sentido negativo) (Nada pasó.)
15. We don't have ____ , but they havc
16. Does John have _ brothcrs? (oración interrogativa) 6. Does he want ¿Quiere algo?
17. No, he doesn't have brothers, but 1 have _ __ anything?
18. No, John has _ _ _ brothers, but he has sisters. (oración interrogativa) 7. Doesn't he want ¿No quiere
19. Do you have _ _ _ sisters? anything? nada (algo)?
20. Yes, 1 have sisters, but ____ brothers.
21. No, 1 don't have brothers, but 1 have sisters.
Jt.
1¡. 22. No, 1 have brothers. EJERCICIO 5
23. No, 1 have _ __
Llene los espacios con anything, something, nothingy traduzca.
24. 1 have brothers. (afinnativo)
'1'
25. Yes, 1 have _ __ l. They don't have _ __
1
2. They don't have , but 1 have _ __
3. We have . (negativo)
SOMETHING, ANYTHING, 4. She has todo. (negativo)
NOT ... ANYTHING, NOTHING 5. Don't you have to do?
6. No, 1 don't have todo.
1 :1; something algo, alguna cosa 7. 1 have todo. (negativo)
anything algo, alguna cosa 8. 1 have todo. (afinnativo)
not ... anything nada, ninguna cosa 9. Did he bu y in New York?
nothing nada, ninguna cosa 10. Yes, he bought in New York.
11. No, he didn't buy in New York.
La regla para el empleo de las siguientes palabras es igual a la que he- 12. No, he bought in New York.
mos visto anteriormente. 13. Did she see .under the bed?
Se emplea something cuando el verbo y el sentido de la oración están 14. Yes, she saw under the bed.
_¡ ¡·
en afirmativo. Se emplea anything cuando la oración tiene un verbo en 15. No, she didn't see under the bed.
negativo o cuando la oración es interrogativa. Se emplea nothing cuando 16. No, she saw _ _ _ under the bed.
el verbo es afimtativo pero el sentido de la oración es negativo. Not ... 17. Did you put in your coffee?
anything equivale a nothing; aquél es mucho más usual.
18. Yes, 1 put in my coffee.
Recuerde Ud. que el inglés no permite doble negación y fíjese en las
19. No, 1 didn't put in my coffee.
traducciones de los ejemplos. 20. No, 1 put in my coffee.
(verbo afirmativo y l. He wants Él quiere algo. 21. Did you hear ?
sentido afirmativo) something. 22. No, 1 didn't hear _ __
Algo pasó. 23. He said he heard . (afinnativo)
(verbo afirmativo y 2. Something 24. 1 don't think he heard _ __
sentido afirmativo) happened.
25. He said he heard . (negativo)
(verbo negativo) 3. He doesn't want No quiere nada. 26. Did you have to eat this moming?
¡1·.1
'1
anything. 27. No, we didn't have to eat this morning, but we had
,,

4. He wants nothing. No quiere nada. _ _ _ to eat last night.

(verbo afirmativo y
28. We had to eat this moming. (negativo)
',¡¡, 1

sentido negativo)
' '1 29. We had to eat last night. (afinnativo)
,¡11

lill 166 167

!·
1'
!¡:,

l\¡1\¡i¡[l\\
~H 1,'11'
1,

1 1!

30. Did she tell you ? (oración interrogativa) 7. Didn't he see ¿No vio a nadie
31 . Did she say to you? anyone? (alguien)?
32. Yes, she said tome. (verbo afirmativo y 8. Somebody Alguien dijo
33. No, she didn't say tome. sentido afirmativo) said something. algo.
34. No, she said tome.
35. Didn't she say to you? (verbo afirmativo y 9. Nobody said Nadie dijo nada.
sentido negativo) anything.

SOMEBODY {SOMEONE), ANYBODY {ANYONE),

NOT ... ANYBODY {ANYONE), EJERCICIO 6
NOBODY {NO ONE) Llene los espacios con anybody (anyone), somebody (someone), no-
body (no one) y traduzca.
somebody (someone) alguien, alguna persona
anybody (anyone) alguien, alguna persona l. Did _ _ _ come this afternoon?
not ... anybody (anyone) nadie, ninguna persona 2. Yes, carne this afternoon.
nobody (no one) nadie, ninguna persona 3. No, carne this afternoon.
4. 1 didn't see _ __
La regla para el empleo de las siguientes palabras es igual a la que he- 5. was there. (negatiPo)
mos visto anteriormente. 6. was there. (afirmativo)
"
1'1,'1
7. Wasn't there?
' l¡ Se emplea somebody (someone) cuando el verbo y el sentido de
la oración están en afirmativo. Se emplea anybody (anyone) cuando la 8. No, was there.
oración tiene un verbo en negativo o cuando la oración es interrogativa. 9. Don't tell _ __
"li Se emplea nobody (no one) cuando el verbo está en afirmativo, pero el 10. No, l'm not going to tell _ __
1111
sentido de la oración es negativo. Not. .. anybody (anyone) equivale a 11 . Did you tell ?
nobody (no one); aquellos son mucho más usuales. 12. No, 1 told ~-
Recuerde Ud. que el inglés no permite doble negación y fíjese en las 13. No, 1 didn't ten _ _ __
traducciones de los ejemplos. 14. You can ask _ __
15. You can't ask
(verbo afirmativo y l. He saw somebody. Él vio a alguien. 16. Can't you ask _ __
sentido afirmativo) 17. Don't ask _ __
1 l,
18. He's going to visit _ __
(verbo afirmativo y 2. Someone called. Alguien llamó.
il' 1[¡ sentido afirmativo) 19. ls he going to visit ?
'l¡¡l i
20. No, he isn't going to visit _ __
1

(verbo negativo) 3. He didn't No vio a nadie. 21. No, he's going to visit _ __
see anybody. 22. We see in the garden. (negativo)
(verbo afirmativo y 4. He saw nobody. No vio a nadie. 23. We don't see in the garden.
sen ti do negativo) 24. We see in the garden. (afirmativo)
25. Can't we see _ _ _ in the garden?
~k~ 1
(verbo afirmativo y 5. No one carne. Nadie vino. (No
26. Yes, we can see in the garden.
f! '1
sentido negativo) vino nadie.)
27. They didn't talk to _ __
;:;1 (oración interrogativa) 6. Did he see ¿Vio a alguien? 28. They talked to . (negativo)
~1 anybody? 29. Did they talk to ?

~· 168 169

ltlli ~li l
~ r! ~ :~ ~ ~
i ¡"1
,,

30. No, they didn't talk to _ __ (verbo afirmativo y 6. Somebody Alguien fue a
31. Why didn't they talk to ? sentido afirmativo) went sorne place. alguna parte.
32. Do you know in Monterrey? (verbo afirmativo y 7. Nobody went Nadie fue a
33. Yes, 1 know there. sentido negativo) anywhere. ningún lado.
34.
35.
No, 1 know
No, 1 don't know
in Monterrey.
in Monterrey.

SOMEWHERE (SOME PLACE),

, EJERCICIO 7
Llene los espacios con anywhere (any place), somewhere (some place),
nowhere (no place) y traduzca.
l. Are you going ___ ?
ANYWHERE (ANY PLACE),
NOT ... ANYWHERE (ANY PLACE), 2. Yes, l'm going _ __
NOWHERE (NO PLACE) 3. No, l'm not going _ _ ,
11 '~
4. No, l'm going _ __
sornewhere (sorne place) alguna parte, algún lado S. He too k her yesterday. (afirmativo)
6. Did he take her yesterday?
anywhere (any place) alguna parte, algún lado
7. No, he didn't take her ___ yesterday.
not ... anywhere (any place) ninguna parte, ningún lado
nowhere (no place) ninguna parte, ningún lado 8. No, he never takes her · - - -
9. Why doesn 't he ever take her ?
1 llil 10. Take her . (afirmativo)
i; La regla para el empleo de las siguientes palabras es igual a la que he- 11. Don't take her _ __
L
1 !;1
mos visto anteriormente.
12. Never take her _ __
Se emplea somewhere (sorne place) cuando el verbo y elsentidq de la
1¡!1'
¡,11
oración están en afirmativo. Se emplea anywhere (any place) cuando 13. He's going to put it _ __
1'
!1 i
la oración tiene el verbo en negativo o cuando la oración es interroga- 14. He isn't going to put it _ __
,1¡·1
tiva. Se emplea nowhere (no place) cuando el verbo está afirmativo pero 15. ls he going to put it ?
1 1 el sentido de la oración es negativo. Not. .. anywhere (any place) equi- 16. lsn't he going to put it ?
1

valen a nowhere (no place); aquéllos son mucho más usuales. 17. Let him go with her.
Recuerde Ud. que el inglés no permite doble negación y fíjese en las 18. Don't let him go with her.
traducciones de los ejemplos. 19. Let'sgo tonight.
20. Let's not go tonight.
'1
(verbo afirmativo y l. He went El fue a alguna 21. Nobody went last night.
l, sentido afirmativo) 22. Bob went last night.
sorne place. parte.
11 ¡1111 i
(verbo negativo) 23. Did you go last night?
2. He didn't go No fue a ningún
11 24. Why didn't you go on Sunday?
anywhere. lado.
25. 1 didn't go on Sunday, but 1 went on Saturday.
(verbo afirmativo y 3. He went nowhere. No fue a ningún
sentido negativo) lado. EVERYTHING, EVERYBODY (EVERYONE);
(oración interrogativa) 4. Did he go ¿Fue a alguna EVERYWHERE (EVERY PLACE)
anywhere? parte?
'l.'':: (oración interrogativa) S. Didn't he go ¿No fue a everything todo, todas las cosas
!1
1

1'111
anywhere? ninguna (alguna) everybody (everyone) todos, todo el mundo
'!,11,
parte? everywhere (every place) por, a, en todas partes
jrii

;,1¡1!

i 1
170 171
"11'
:1,11
1,¡

1111\~1!'1 1
,1111'1,
r J ~~~~

Se emplean las palabras everything, everybody (everyone), every- 18. She sold (todo) _ _ _ in her house.
where (every place) en oraciones afirmativas, negativas, interrogativas o 19. They liked to go (a todas partes) _ __
interrogativas negativas. 20. (Todo el mundo) is asking the same question.
Las palabras everybody (everyone), everything siempre llevan el ver- 21. He thinks that (todo) is easy.
bo en singular. Estudie las siguientes oraciones. 22. We were looking for you (por todas partes) _ __
1 '

(afirmativo)
(afirmativo)
l. He has everything.
2. Everybody
Él tiene todo.
Todo el mundo
:1 23.
24.
25.
How is (todos) ?
He had friends (en todas partes) _ __
(Todo el mundo) is doing something.
1
~
,,

is sick. está mal.

(interrogativo) 3. Is everyone ¿Están todos? VERBOS y PREPOSICIONES
he re?
:!
1
(interrogativo negativo) 4. Isn't everyone ¿No están Estudie los siguientes verbos y preposiciones.
here? todos?
l. to go out salir
(negativo) 5. He didn't No buscó por He went out. Él salió.
look everywhere. todas partes. 2. to go out of salir de
(interrogativo) 6. Did he look ¿Buscó por todas He went out of the room. Salió del cuarto.
everywhere? partes? 3. to look out asomarse
He looked out. Él se asomó.
4. to look out of asomarse por
EJERCICIO 8 He looked out of the window. Se asomó por la ventana.
·'1
Llene los espacios, con everything, everybody (everyone), everywhere 5 . to take (something) out sacar (algo)
''11 He took the flowers out. Sacó las flores.
'
(every place),y traduzca.
6. to take (something) out of sacar (algo) de
l. Do you have (todo) ? He took the flowers out of the vase. Sacó las flores del florero.
2. Is (todos) here? 7. out of fuera de
3. (Todo el mundo) wants to go. 8. outside afuera (de un local), fuera de
4. Did you look (por todas partes) ? 9. up arriba, hacia arriba
5. We looked for the children (por todos lados) _ __ 10. down abajo, hacia abajo
6. Did you eat (todo) ?
7. ls (todos) listening tome?
8. There are grass and trees (por todos lados) _ __ EJERCICI09
9. My father does (todo) _ __ Traduzca las siguientes oraciones. Cámbielas al negativo, interrogativo e
10. Let's invite (todo el mundo)---· interrogativo negativo.
11. (Todos) is sick.
12. (Todo) happens to him. l. He goes out of town every Sunday.
13. We saw John's parents (por todos sitios) _ __ 2. He went out of town last week.
14. The teacher was mad at (todos) _ __ 3. They go out about nine o'clock.
15. ls (todo) ready? 4. They went out yesterday for an hour.
16. (Por todos lados) 1 look, 1 see them. 5. She can loo k out of the window.
17. (A todos) likes coffee and cake. 6. She looked out of the door.
1

172 173
i !1'.1

!1 ,,,~
1
''i

ÍIJ1i :1111
 llljl.l
r!
' 11,11

1¡
! .

7. She's looking out ofthe window. EJERCICIO 11

8. She was going to look out ofthe window.
Práctica Verbal
9. You took something out.
l. He always loses them.
10. He took the flowers out ofthe vase. 2. He doesn't always lose them.
11. He was taking the bed ou(of the bedroom.
3. Does he always lose them?
12. He's going to take the chair out of the living room.
4. Doesn't he always lose them?
S. Why does he always lose them?
6. He lost it at school.
EJERCICIO 10 7. He didn't lose it at school.
Llene los espacios con la preposición correcta y traduzca. 8. Did he lose it at school?
9. Didn't he lose it at school?
! ,1: l. My husband went (salió de) town yesterday. 10. How did he lose it at school?
2. Do you want to go (salir de) town on your saint's day? 11. He's going to lose everything.
3. He was walking (calle abajo) the street when 1 saw him. 12. He isn't going to lose everything.
4. 1 looked (hacia abajo) , but 1 didn't see anything. 13. ls he going to lose everything?
S. He looked (hacia arriba) , but he didn't see anybody. 14. lsn't he going to lose everything?
6. Don't look (hacia arriba) ; look (hacia abajo) _ __ 1S. How is he going to lose everything?
:¡
7. Why don't you go (sales de) town next week? 16. He was losing the race.
', '. 1 ':·i.¡'.¡ 8. They're (fuera de) the city. 17. He wasn't losing the race .
,;';11 :! ¡1,i 9. Tell the child to wait (afuera) _ __ 18. Was he losing the race?
~~. i il!
1

1 10. The manis waiting (afuera) _ __ 19. Wasn't he losing the race?
! í '1,¡11
11. Come (bájate) from that tree. 20. Why was he losing the race?
• 1
1
12. She was very tired when she carne (subió) _ __ 21. He wanted to lose both.
1.\,1 111.1 13. She looked (se asomó) , but she didn't see anything. 22. He didn't want to lose both.
; 1.' 14. You can see the school from here ifyou look (se asoma por) 23. Did he want to lose both?
_ _ _ that window. 24. Didn't he want to lose both?
lS. Why did you look (te asomaste) ? 2S. Why did he want to lose both?
16. 1 want to sleep, so please take the children (saca) _ __ 26. He cou1d lose this one.
17. l'm going to take the glasses (sacar de) the dining room 27. He couldn't lose this one.
and wash them. 28. Could he lose this one?
,,11' 11
18. How many did you take (sacó) ? 29. Couldn't he lose this one?
,,'11 19. She took the bread (sacó de) the kitchen. 30. Why couldn't he lose this one?
20. 1 want to take that rug (sacar de) the house. 31. He had to lose it.
¡11
21. She was sick yesterday and couldn't go (salir de) her room. 32. He didn't have to lose it.
22. 1 went (salt') with a very nice girllast night. 33. Did he have to lose it?
23. Are you going to go (salir) with her tonight? 34. Didn't he have to lose it?
24. 1 can see them if 1 look (me asomo por) the door. 3S. Why did he have to lose it?
2S. Why are you taking your dresses (sacando) ?
26. If you aren't feeling well, don't go (salgas) _ __ EJERCICIO 12
27. Don't be afraid tolook (asomarse por) the window.
Práctica Verbal Repita el ejercicio 11, usando formas de los verbos win,
'.1,.1
28. Don't take that chair (saque de) the living room.
" start, close, go to sleep, go to bed, stop, listen (to), get sleepy en ora-
i.l!
r'j
1
174 175
' ·ill
11 1¡,

"
' 'l
'li'¡
1\¡\1
' 1

' ¡!\¡
'11 ¡ :1,',1.1.1
11¡1'
'¡'ji¡
'1

'' dones cortas. Use un sustantivo o pronombre distinto con cada verbo . 2. No, no encontré a nadie.
. 11 \'f
Use las palabras interrogativas how y why cuando sea posible. 3. El me dijo que tenía (algunas) manzanas.
4. ¿Les diste a ellos café?
1 5. No, no les di café.
EjERCICIO 13 6. ¿Dónde están todos?
Lea y traduzca. 7. María tiene algo para Ud., pero nada para mí.
8. Llegamos a México ell3 de septiembre.
9. Si camina Ud. hacia la casa, puede ver la luz en la sala.
,'i
1, THE RABBIT ANO THE TURTLE 10. Hoy no tengo nada que hacer, porque lo hice todo z.yer.
¡ 11. Nadie comió nada.
¡ A rabbit was always laughlng at a turtle because he couldn't run very 12. Todos van a ir a alguna parte.
J;;c
¡; 'i ~ fast. The turtle never got mad at the rabbit when the rabbit laughed
,11¡1 at him. One day the rabbit said to the turtle, "All the animals here know
that you can run very fast, so let's run arace." EJERCICIO 15
All the other animals began to laugh at the turtle because they knew Dictado
that he was very slow, and they thought he was afraid to run a race
with the rabbit. l. His birthday is on the 31st of August, and his saint's day is on the
1
Then the turtle began to get angry. "I'm tired of everyone saying 5th of July.
that I'm slow ," he said, "and if the rabbit wants to run a race, I'm 2. Nobody carne to visit me on Sunday.
1 .· f¡l re~dy." 3. Everybody likes m y new blue suit.
1;1!¡'
11! "You can start here," said tht! fox, "and run as far as that big tree 4. There wasn't any coffee, so my mother went into the kitchen to
''1li' over there in the next field. We'rc going to be there to meet the one make sorne.
il,l.ll, who tlnishes the race frrst." 5. Do you ever get sleepy before ten o'clock?
]1 1

"O.K.," said the turtle. "Let's start the race." 6. 1 went to bed very early last night, but 1 didn't go to sleep until
l]l¡ The rabbit started to run very fast, and soon he was so far from the eleven- thirty.
1

turtle that he couldn't see him. 7. Don't you see those animals coming toward you?
i :111
8. 1 listened to the radio last night, but after a while 1 got sleepy.
"I'm going to stop for a few minutes and wait until the turtle gets
1
here," said the rabbit. So he sat down on the grass under a big tree. 9. We stopped in front of your house last night and saw you looking
1,1 :

After a while he began to get sleepy; so he lay down on the grass, out of the window.
1
1

!!
·:

closed his eyes, and went to sleep. 10. I'm sorry, but you can't talk to Mr. Carter. He's out oftown.
:,1
Sometime later the turtle, going very slowly, passed by the tree and
saw the rabbit asleep under it. The rabbit slept and slept. When he woke
11' !'1.1!11'1.
up, he saw all the animals under t~e big tree in the tleld, and he heard EJERCICIO 16
:' ·' '11
the fox telling the other animals that the turtle won the race. Conversación Conteste las siguientes preguntas.
1
The rabbit ran to the tree, but of course he got there too late. The l. What color are your eyes?
fox said to him, "You lost the race and the turtle won it." 2. What color is your dress?
3. What color is your book?
EJERCICIO 14 Conteste las siguientes preguntas en afirmativo y en negativo.
Escriba en inglés. Use las palabras sorne y any siempre que sea posible.
'
4. Did you listen to the radio last night?
l i,l¡ l. ¿Encontraste a alguien en la calle? 5. Did you start home at four-tlfteen?

1'11·
'1' 176 177
!:l¡i
1'1'

,,1¡1 f~tl
',•1¡
 6. Did she go any place last night?
7. Aren 't you going anywhere tomorrow?
8. Did you go anywhere l~st Sunday?

•••• Tirn
9. Did you look everywhere?
10. Do you ever go any place at night?
11. Don't you ever go anywhere?
12. Do you ever watch TV?
13. Do you have anything to eat?
14. Does he have anything todo?
15. Does she have anything toread?
16. Do you see anybody?
17. Did he bu y any?
18. Did she sell any dresses?
19. Did you leave anything on the table?
20. Did she say anything?
21. Did you lose anything?
22. Did you hear anyone?
·-~·----~-~-.,
r\'J'®@mlilmilmLPlJ®
ót
23. Did he ask anyone?
j 24. Did she tell anybody? l. to show' showed mostrar'
1 mostró, enseñar, enseñó
11. busy ocupado
l!;¡¡¡
111
1
25. Did you go out of town last week? 12. rich rico
':11
2. to hurry, hurried apresurarse, 13. poor pobre
. i'l se apresuró 14. pure puro
1i ~
- ¡¡·1 1' 1 ¡
1 '1

3. to kili, killed matar, mató 15. beautiful hermoso, guapa

~~· ·¡
''¡¡11

'.·111!,,1
4. to cut, cut cortar, cortó 16. gold oro, de oro
¡;¡ :! 1'1 5. to become, became llegar golden de oro; dorado
• i '¡¡: a ser, llegó a ser; hacerse, 17. goose gansa, oca
1!
se hizo; volverse, se volvió; geese gansos, ocas
ponerse, se puso 18. farm granja
6. to love, loved amar, amó farmer granjero
7. as mientras; cuando 19. food alimento, comida
t 8. while mientras que 20. another otro
9. once una vez 21. hand mano
lO. again otra vez
t!¡
,, '11

111

i
i MODISMOS

l. to lay eggs, laid eggs poner huevos, puso huevos

·.··¡1,
l. 2. to get rich, got rich hacerse rico, se hizo rico
!
3. at once inmediatamente; de una vez
4. Hurry (up ). Apresúrese
S. I'm in a hurry. Estoy de prisa. Tengo prisa.
il !!j:ll
t
1
!1 178 179
1

,i·'¡
'i

ilill.l'llill
 6. scrambled eggs huevos revueltos Si el primer verbo de la oración es afirmativo, el auxiliar en h pre-
fried eggs huevos fritos gunta corta estará en negativo. Si el primer verbo es negativo, el auxi-
boiled eggs huevos cocidos liar en la pregunta corta estará en afirmativo. Estudie los siguientrs
7. to be about tratar de ejemplos.
What's the book about? ¿De qué trata el libro?
What's it about? ¿De qué trata?
It's about animals. Trata de animales.
~ 1. lt 's clean, isn 't it?
8. not. .. either no ... tampoco 1'f lt isn't clean, is it?
2. There's time, isn 't there?
1 didn't go either. Yo no fui tampoco, Tampoco fui yo. 1' There isn't any time, is there?
3. He's eating, isn't he?
EJERCICIO 1
He isn't eating, is he?
4. They're going to come, aren't they?
Traduzca las siguientes oraciones y practique leyéndolas. They aren't going to come, are they?
5. You were writing, weren't you?
l. Let them win.
You weren't writing, were you?
2. Don't let them win.
6. 1 have to eat, don't 1?
3. What's the story about?
1 don't have to eat, do 1?
4. The story is about a farmer.
7. The car works, doesn't it?
5. The story isn't about a farmer.
The car doesn't work, does it?
6. Is the story about a farmer?
8. Henry likes to teach, doesn't he?
7. lsn 't the story about a farmer?
Henry doesn't like to teach, does he?
8. What was it about?
9. John's sister went, didn't she?
9. lt was about a poor farmer. John's sister didn't go, did she?
10. lt wasn't about a poor farmer.
10. Your brother wanted to sleep, didn't he?
11. Was it about a poor farmer? Your brother didn't want to sleep, did he?
12. Wasn't it about a poor farmer? 11. John can win, can't he?
13. That goose laid an egg yesterday. John can't win, can he?
14. That goose didn't layan egg yesterday. 12. Mary and 1 could study, couldn't we?
15. Did that goose layan egg yesterday? Mary and 1 couldn't study, could we?
16. Didn't that goose layan egg yesterday?
17. He's listening to the radio.
18. He isn't listening to the radio.
19. Is he listening to the radio? EJERCICIO 2
20. Isn't he listening to the radio?
1
Traduzca las siguientes oraciones.
!
EL EQUIVALENTE DE lNO ES VERDAD? l. Tú trabajas en una tienda, ¿verdad?
2. No trabajas en una tienda, ¿verdad?
Para traducir las preguntas ¿no es verdad?, ¿verdad?, ¿no?, ¿no es 3. Trabajaste en una tienda, ¿verdad?
así'!, con las que se pide asentimiento o confirmaciól), se repite el 4. No trabajaste en una tienda, ¿verdad?
1 .·1
pronombre (o el pronombre correspondiente al sustanttvo) y se usa 5. Él va a traer el dinero, ¿verdad?
_;_~ el auxiliar que se emplearía para poner el verbo en negativo. 6. Él no va a traer el dinero, ¿verdad?
t!

~ 1,1;11
; ; :¡
180 181
! .. 11

,1,1'1
 7. Él iba a traer el dinero, ¿verdad? 49. Hay un libro, ¿verdad?
8. Él no iba a traer el dinero, ¿verdad? 50. No hay un libro, ¿verdad?
9. Ella está regresando, ¿verdad? 51. Había dos muchachos, ¿verdad?
10. Ella no está regresando, ¿verdad? 52. No había dos muchachos, ¿verdad?
11. Ella estaba regresando, ¿verdad?
12. Ella no estaba regresando, ¿verdad? ~.

13. Podemos olvidar, ¿verdad? t:

EJERCICIO 3
14. No podemos olvidar, ¿verdad? J Llene los espacios con el equivalente correcto de lverdad? y traduzca.
15. Pudimos olvidar, ¿verdad? 1 t
16. No pudimos olvidar, ¿verdad? l. 1t doesn't make any difference, ?
17. A uds. les gusta oír el radio, ¿verdad? 2. lt's time to go, ?
18. A uds. no les gusta oír el radio, ¿verdad? 3. Walter doesn't have anything todo, ?
19. A uds. les gustó oír el radio, ¿verdad? 4. It was Miss Stewart who turned on the TV, ?
20. A uds. no les gustó oír el radio, ¿verdad? 5. Y o u were waiting for somebody, ?
21. Ellos quieren saber, ¿verdad? 6. lt's very late, ?
22. Ellos no quieren saber, ¿verdad? 7. There isn't any room, ?
23. Ellos quisieron saber, ¿verdad? 8. Mrs. Lane's little boy was seven years old the day before yester-
24. Ellos no quisieron saber, ¿verdad? day, ?
25. Juan tiene que levantarse temprano, ¿verdad? 9. That boy's name is Edward, ?
26. Juan no tiene que levantarse temprano, ¿verdad? 10. It was very cold last night, ?
27. Juan tuvo que levantarse temprano, ¿verdad? 11. Yo u said good-bye to Mr. Burns, ?
28. Juan no tuvo que levantarse temprano, ¿verdad? 12. He couldn't come at five o'clock either, ?
29. María entiende el inglés, ¿verdad? 13. Sam didn 't fmish early, ?
30. María no entiende el inglés, ¿verdad? 14. Dorothy's birthday is going to be the day after tomorrow, ?
31. María entendió el inglés, ¿verdad? 15. 1 can visit my grandmother every Thursday, ?
32. María no entendió el inglés, ¿verdad?
33. Las muchachas se ponen sus vestidos, ¿verdad?
34. Las muchachas no se ponen sus vestidos, ¿verdad? TO THE TEACHER
35. Las muchachas se pusieron sus vestidos, ¿verdad?
36. Las muchachas no se pusieron sus vestidos, ¿verdad? Although prepositions will, normally, always govem the objective
37. Puedo escribir, ¿verdad? case, whom should not be used in conversational English as the object
38. No puedo escribir, ¿verdad? of a preposition that ends a sentence.
39. Pude escribir, ¿verdad? The tendency, when speaking English, is to use the nominative form
40. No pude escribir, ¿verdad? who to introduce direct and indirect questions. Observe the following
41. Alicia y yo ayudamos, ¿verdad? sentences.
42. Alicia y yo no ayudamos, ¿verdad?
Who are you going to the movies with? (direct)
43. Alicia y yo ayudábamos, ¿verdad?
Who have you been looking for? (direct)
44. Alicia y yo no ayudábamos, ¿verdad?
1 asked hirn who he was talking to. (indirect)
45. Ud. y María se lavan, ¿verdad?
46. Ud. y María no se lavan, ¿verdad?
47. Ud. y María se lavaron, ¿verdad?
48. Ud. y María no se lavaron, ¿verdad?

182 183
 LAS PREPOSICIONES 18. What were they looking at?
AL FINAL DE LA ORACIÓN 19. Wha t is he listening to?
20. What was he listening to?
Las preposiciones tales como at, to, of, for, from, with, about que se 21. Who is she talking to?
colocan al principio de las preguntas en español, se colocan en inglés 22. Who was she talking to?
al final. Estudie las siguientes oraciones: 23. What are yo u thinking about?
24. What were you thinking of?
l. What's it made of? ¿De qué es? 25. What are you looking for?
2. What are you laughing at? ¿De qué te ríes? 26. What was he looking for?
3. Who are you going with? ¿Con quién vas? 27. What are they going to look for?
4. Where did he come from? ¿De dónde vino él? 28. What were they going to look for?
5. What are yo u looking for? ¿Qué busca Ud.? 29. What are yo u working so hard for?
6. What are they looking at? ¿Qué ven? 30. What are you taking that book for?
7. What did you want that for? ¿Para qué quisiste eso? 31. Who did he give that to?
8. What did he go home for? ¿Para qué fue a casa? 32. What did you come so early for?
He went home to eat. (Recuérdese que no se usa la palabra for 33. What did yo u give him the money for?
(para) antes de un infinitivo). Pero: He went home for his book. 34. What did you say that for?
(Se puede usar for antes de un sustantivo.) 35. Who did she go with?
He went home beca use (porque) he was sick. 36. Who did he go to the movies with?
37. Who is he going with?
38. Who was he going with?
EJERCICIO 4 39. Who is he sitting with?
Lea y traduzca las siguientes oraciones. Contéstelas, usando el vocabu- 40. Who was he sitting with?
'1
1

lario que ha visto con anterioridad. 41. Who is he studying with?

42. Who is he living with?
l. Where are yo u from?
2. What city did you come from?
3. What country did your parents come from? EJERCICIO 5
4. What state (estado) did your father come from? Traduzca estas oraciones, colocando la preposición al final de la pre-
5. What do you and your friend talk about? gunta.
6. What did you talk about?
7. What are you talking about? l. ¿Para qué quieres eso?
8. What were you talking about? 2. ¿Para qué trajiste tu libro?
9. What are you going to talk about? 3. ¿Para qué lo vas a usar?
10. What were you going to talk about? 4. ¿A cuántos profesores vas a buscar?
11. What was the book about? S. ¿De dónde vino su esposa?
1 ,,
12. What was the movie about? 6. ¿De cuál escuela vinieron sus niños?
,¡,1,11¡ 13. What was the lesson about? 7. ¿De dónde vino toda esta agua?
·1¡1¡1
14. What is the conversation about? 8. ¿Con quién vino ella?
15. What are you laughing at? 9. ¿Con quién fue ella?
16. What were you laughing at? 10. ¿A quién dio él el dinero?
17. What are they looking at? 11. ¿De qué estaban hablando esos hombres?
184 185
 12. ¿De qué trata la carta?
13. ¿En qué estás pensando? EJERCICIO 7
14. ¿En qué estaban ellos pensando? Llene los espacios con any, sorne, no, noney traduzca.
15. ¿De qué se está riendo esa muchacha?
16. ¿Qué estás buscando? l. There's milk in the house. (negativo)
17. ¿Cuántos vas a buscar? 2. That's why 1 couldn't drink for breakfast.
18. ¿Para qué necesitas el dinero? 3. 1 didn't drink either.

l
1:!1
19.
20.
¿Para qué estás haciendo eso?
¿Para qué estás llevando sombrero?
4.
5.
6.
Did you drink
No, 1 didn't drink
No, 1 drank
?
because there was
because there wasn't
in the house.
in the house.
7. 1 am going to bu y _ __
PREPOSICIONES 8. You can buy at that store.
1 9. Yes, 1 think they have in that store.
Aprenda estas preposiciones. 10. No, they have milk in that store.
l. through a través de, por 4. on the other side of má5
2. across al otro lado de allá de, pasando EJERCICIO 8
3. up to hasta S. between entre Llene los espacios con anything, something, nothingy traduzca.
6. among entre
Among se usa refiréndose a más de dos, l. l'm going to the store. Do you want ?
Between se usa refiriéndose a dos. 2. No, 1 don't want , but 1 think my mother wants _ __
3. She said she didn't want _ __
EJERCICIO 6 4. There's (negativo) in the house to eat.
Llene los espacios con la preposición correcta y traduzca. 5. Buy for dinner.
6. There's (afinnativo) in the kitchen that we can eat.
l. The dog lay down (entre) the trees. 7. No, there isn't in the kitchen, and we have _ _ _ __
2. The dog ran (entre) the two boys. (negativo) for dinner.
3. The dog ran (a través de) the house. 8. 1 didn't have to eat for breakfast, but I'm going to have
4. The dog ran (hasta) the house. _ _ _ to eat for dinner.
5. We found the money (entre) those two big chairs. 9. Don't you have todo?
6. lsn't that man afraid to walk (entre) all those animals? 10. No, 1 have todo.
7. lfyou walk (por) the garden, you can see my beautiful
flowers.
8. We went (por) Chicago when we visited the United States. EJERCICIO 9
9. She can work (hasta) the 15th of August.
10. Texas is (al otro lado de) the Rio Grande. Llene los espacios con anybody (anyone), somebody (someone ), nobody
11. How many trees are there (entre) my house and yours? (no one) y traduzca.
12. 1 think you can fmd your books (entre) mine.
l. Did you talk to ?
13. What are you walking (por) my bedroom for?
2. No, there was to talk to.
14. The dining room is (entre) the kitchen and the living room. 3. Wasn't there in the living room to talk to?
15. Did you ever live (entre) Americans? 4. Yes, there was in the living room to talk to, but _ __
16. Taxco is (más allá de) Cuemavaca.
spoke English.
186 187
~·1''''1.1!1
1•!

1 . S. I'm going to invite (afirmativo) that speaks English. 2. He doesn't want to become a doctor.
6. Don't invite that can't speak English. 3. Does he want to become a doctor?
:¡ 7. (negativo) here can speak English. , 4. Doesn't he want to become a doctor?
8. Then fmd that can speak English. 1:· S. When does he want to become a doctor?
9. 1 know (afirmativo) that can speak English. 6. He became a teacher.
10. 1 don't know that can speak English. 7. He didn't become a teacher.
8. Did he become a teacher?
EJERCICIO 10
9. Didn't he become a teacher?
10. Why didn't he become a teacher?
Llene los espacios con anywhere (any place), somewhere (sorne place), 11. He's going to become a farmer.
nowhere (no place) y traduzca. 12. He isn't going to become a farmer.
l. 1 want to go ____ tomorrow. 13. ls he going to become a farmer?
14. Isn't he going to become a farmer?
2. 1 don't want to go tomorrow.
lS. When is he going to become a farmer?
3. Do you want to go tomorrow?
16. He was going to become a doctor.
4. No, I want to go tomorrow.
17. He wasn't going to become a doctor.
S. Nobody wants to go tomorrow.
6. They ate near the office. 18. Was he going to become a doctor?
7. Did they eat near the office? 19. Wasn't he going to become a doctor?
8. No, they didn't eat ____ near the office. 20. Why wasn't he going to become a doctor?
9. They ate close to the office. 21. He can become a teacher.
22. He can't become a teacher.
10. They never like to eat close to the office.
23. Can he become a teacher?
24. Can't he become a teacher?
EJERCICIO 11 2S. Why can't he become a teacher?
26. He has to become a farmer.
Llene los espacios y traduzca.
27. He doesn't have to become a farmer.
l. He took (todo) _ __ 28. Does he ha ve to become a farmer?
2. (Todo el mundo) knows him and likes him. 29. Doesn't he have to become a farmer?
3. There are good and bad people (por todas partes) _ __ 30. Why does he have to become a farmer?
4. My parents always let me do (todo) _ __ 31. He had to become a doctor.
S. Tell (todos)--· 32. He didn't have to become a doctor.
6. She taught (en todas partes) in Mexico. 33. Did he have to become a doctor?
7. (Todo) is going to be ready for tomorrow. 34. Didn't he have to become a doctor?
8. They woke up (todos) in the house. 3S. Why did he have to become a doctor?
9. We're going to take them (a todos lados) _ __
10. (Todo el mundo) is going to be hungry.
EJERCICIO 13

EJERCICIO 12 Práctica Verbal Repita el ejercicio 72, usando formas de los verbos
hurry, show, kili, get rich, cut, love, lay eggs en oraciones cortas. Use un
Práctica Verbal sustantivo o pronombre distinto con cada verbo. Use las palabras inte-
l. He wants to become a doctor. rrogativas why y when cuando sea posible.

188 189
 EJERCICIO 14 2. 1¿Nunca puedes llegar temprano?
Lea y traduzca. 3. El granjero se hizo rico porque tenía una gansa que puso un huevo
de oro.
4. ¿Por qué estabas caminando entre estos dos hombres?
THE GOOSE THAT LAID 5. Llevé algunos huevos cocidos conmigo porque creía que iba a tener
THE GOLDEN EGG hambre.
6. Él le dijo a ella que la quería mucho, ¿verdad?
Once there was a farmer who lived with his wife on a farm in the 7. ¿Para qué estás viviendo en México?
country. They had to work hard every day because they were very 8. Si trabajas mucho, te vas a hacer rico dentro de unos pocos
poor. Often there wasn't any food in the house to eat. afíos, ¿verdad?
The farmer and his wife had a cow anda goose. The cow gave milk, 9. ¿Con quién fue al cine?
and the goose laid eggs. Every day the farmer went to the barn to get 10. Yo no lo vi en el cine tampoco.
the egg that the goose laid. Sometimes there was no egg in the barn,
so the farmer and his wife had to go to bed hungry.
One night when the farmer went to get the egg, he was very happy EJERCICIO 16
to find a goose egg of pure gold in the barn.
Dictado
The farmer took the egg, hurried to the house, and showed it to his
l!l!l
wife, saying, "Look. Our goose laid a golden egg. We're going to be
rich." f l.
2.
He couldn't stop and talk to us because he was in a hurry.
What are you wearing your new dress for?
"Let me see," said the farmer's wife. She put her hand on the egg
and felt it. "It's gold-pure gold," she said. "Now we're never going
to go to bed hungry again."
i 3.
4.
Where are your parents from?
He said he was from Texas, didn't he?
5. Are you too busy to se e me now?
The next day the farmer found another beautiful golden egg in the 6. Does anyone have any books that I can read?
barn. And the next day and the next the goose laid a golden egg, and 7. You don't have to work up to four o'clock every da y, do you?
the farmer and his wife got very rich. Now they didn't have to work, 8. 1 didn't see him at the movies either.
and there was always food in the house to eat. 9. Go to the store and get sorne milk while 1 set the table.
As the farmer got rich, he began to think more and more of having 10. As we were leaving, she said, "Please come back again."
all the golden eggs at once. One day he said to his wife, "Let's kili the
goose that lays the golden eggs, and then we can have all the eggs at
once. 1 want to be very rich." EJERCICIO 17
"All right," answered his wife. "Go get (ve por) the goose." Conversación Conteste las siguientes preguntas.
The farmer brought the goose in the house and put her on the table.
Then, while his wife helped him, he killed the goose. He cut her open l. Where are you from?
(le abrió) with a knife and found-nothing! 2. Where did you come from?
They killed the goose that laid the golden egg. 3. What state are you from?
4. Who did you come with?
5. Who are yo u waiting for?
EJERCICIO 15 6. What are you looking at?
Escriba en inglés. 7. What are you looking for?
8. What are you laughing at?
l. Apresúrese. Estoy de prisa y no puedo esperar. 9. What are you listening to?

190 191
 "11
1

--

" 10. What are you putting on?

11. Who are you talking to? 1
1'

~rn
12. What are you talking about?
13.

14.
15.
What are you thinking of(about)?
Conteste las siguientes preguntas en afirmativo y en negativo.
Did they look every where?
Did they go anywhere?
•.-0
~

16. Did he ask any questions?

17. Did she take any books?
18. Did they bring any apples?
' 1¡:¡
19. Does he live with anybody?
20. Do you want anything?
21. Do you need anything?
22. Did you go out of town yesterday?
23. Did he go out oftown last month? \J®@ml0DDDIDIT~®
24. Is he out oftown? to break, broke romper, 8. short corto, chaparro
25. Was he out oftown? rompió 9. black negro
to try, tried tratar, trató; 10. crow cuervo
probar, probó (de intentar) 11. pitcher jarra
to drop, dropped tirar, 12. woods bosque
tiró; caérsele a uno, se le forest bosque
cayó a uno 13. stone piedra
to pick out, picked out rock roca
escoger, escogió 14. way manera; camino
to pickup, picked up 15. idea idea
alzar, alzó; recoger, 16. top parte superior; cima
recogió 17. cream crema
to reach, reached alcanzar, 18. sugar azúcar
alcanzó;llegar, llegó 19. potatoes papas
strong fuerte 20. head cabeza

MODISMOS

l. to give up darse por vencido

2. to get thirsty, hungry, sleepy, etc. darle a uno sed, hambre, sue-
ño, etc.
He got thirsty. Le dio sed .
3. more than anything else más que nada, por encima de todo

192 193
 4. There is (are) .. .left. Queda(n) ... 14. You aren't going to be hungry, are you?
1
There's one left. Queda uno. 15. Where are you coming from?
There are three left. Quedan tres. 16. What are you looking at?
5. to have .. .left quedársele a uno ... 17. What were you looking at?
1 have one left. Me queda uno.
He has three left. Le quedan a él tres.
Aprenda estas palabras.
6. not ... any more, not ... any longer ya no
1 don't work here any more. Ya no trabajo aquí. l. to fill, filled llenar, llenó 21. verb verbo
1 don't live in Mexico any longer. Ya no vivo en México. 2. to complete, completed 22. no un sustantivo
'l¡ 7. plenty (of) bastante (de sobrar) 23. prono un pronombre
completar, completó
:¡11, 1 have plenty. Tengo bastante. 3. to translate, translated 24. objective pronoun pro-
1 have plenty of time. Tengo bastante tiempo. traducir, tradujo nombre objetivo
i'll (Se emplea of sólo cuando sigue un sustantivo.) 25. possessive prono un
1
4. to place, placed colocar,
1 8. enough suficiente, bastante (de alcanzar) colocó pronombre posesivo
enough time suficiente tiempo, bastante tiempo 26. preposition preposición
1

5 . to practice, practiced
rall enough bastante alto practicar, practicó 2 7. singular singular
(Se emplea enough antes de los sustantivos y después de los adje- 6. to pronounce, pronounced 28. plural plural
tivos y adverbios.) pronunciar, pronunció 29. English inglés
9. a great deal ( of) mucho Estos deben usarse en afirmativo 7. to change, changed 30. correct correcto
[ en vez de much. También pue- cambiar, cambió 31. following siguiente
a lot (of) mucho, muchos
den e1~plearse en negativo e inte-
lots (of) mucho, muchos
l rrogatzvo.
(Se emplea of sólo cuando sigue un sustantivo. A great deal (of) se
8. to forro, formed formar,
formó
9. to dictate, dictated dictar,
dictó
32. number número
33. affirmative afinnativo
34. negative negativo
35. interrogative interrogativo
emplea solamente con o al referirse a un sustantivo en singular.)
10. sentence oración 36. tense tiempo
11. phrase frase 3 7. present tense tiempo
EJERCICIO 1 presente
12. blank espacio
Traduzca las siguientes oraciones y practique leyéndolas. 13. idiom modismo 38. past tense tiempo pasado
14. vocabulary vocabulario 39. future tense tiempo futuro
l. It's cold, isn 't it? 15 . auxiliary auxiliar 40. adverb of frequency
2. It isn 't cold, is it? adverbio de frecuencia
16. conversation conversación
3. It was warm, wasn't it? 41. homework tarea (de
17. infinitive infmitivo
4. It wasn't warm, was it? escuela)
18. adjective adjetivo
5. It's going to be cold, isn't it? 42. exercise ejercicio
19. possessive adjective
6. lt isn't going to be cold, is it? 43. page página
adjetivo posesivo
7. It was going to be warm, wasn't it? 44. dictation dictado
20. adverb adverbio
8. It wasn't going to be warm, was it?
9. You're hungry, aren't you?
10. You aren't hungry, are you? EJERCICIO 2
11. Yo u were hungry, weren't you? Lea y traduzca las siguientes oraciones.
12. You weren't hungry, were you?
13. You're going to be hungry, aren't you? l. Fill the blanks with the correct preposition and translate.

194 195
 ;111'11'
1,

1
1!:

2. Prono unce the past tense of these verbs. 5. Don't eat (much, many) food before you go to bed.
3. Study the present tense of these verbs. 6. 1 don't know why you brought so (many, much) eggs.
4. Read and translate the following sentences. 7. Do you have to leam (many, much) verbs tomorrow?
''.1 8. ( few, little) children were sic k the day befare yesterday.
5. Study these phrases. Change them to the negative, interrogative,

,,
;¡
and interrogative negative. 9. 1 have very (few, little) work todo.
6. Write the following sentences in English. 10. How (many, much) _ _ _ time do you need?
7. Learn the following idioms.
8. In English, adjectives are placed before nouns.
,,
l'h
9. English adjectives have no singular or plural.
11
10. Fill the blanks with the correct form ofthe verb. EJERCICIO 5
1'
1 l. Learn the objective pronouns. Llene los espacios con el pronombre posesivo que corresponde a las pa-
12. After the auxiliary can, we use the infinitive without to. labras entre paréntesis y traduzca.
'1' 13. We're going to practice the verbs.
! '¡¡ l. 1 don't like my new suit, but 1 like (his new suit) _ __
14. We're going to have conversation.
15. l'm going to dicta te these sentences. 2. He ate his apple, and she ate (her apple) _ __
3. She lost her notebook, so we gave her (our notebook) _ __
4. We wore our hats, and they wore (their hats) _ __
EJERCICIO 3 5. This book is (my book) _ __
Coloque los adverbios de frecuencia en su lugar correcto y traduzca. 6. That book is (your book) _ __
7. My saint's day is in June. When is (your saint's day) ?
1. ( ever) Didn 't they se e a goose that la id a gol den egg? 8. lfyou don't have a pen, you can use (my pen) _ __
2. (seldom) He sleeps for two hours in the afternoon. 9. 1 don't want to use (her book) _ __
3. (always) Could they bring their dog with them? 10. 1 want to use (my book) _ __
4. (never) He can find what he's looking for.
5. (e ver) Did yo u see so many people?
6. (usually) Does he bring his wife and family with him?
EJERCICIO 6
7. ( rarely) 1 saw him befo re supper.
8. (sometimes) Why does he wait for her? Llene los espacios con any, so me, no, none y traduzca.
9. ( always) She was looking at that picture on the wall.
l. Did you find potatoes in the kitchen?
JO. (ever) 1 can't pronounce his n.1me.
2. No, 1 didn't find potatoes, but 1 found bread.
3. Are you looking for English teachers now?
EJERCICIO 4 4. Yes, I'm looking for English teachers, but 1 don't want
_ _ _ who aren't American.
Llene los e~pacios con la palabra correcta y traduzca. (Recuerde que
5. Are yo u going to bu y dresses when you go to the United
many y few se emplean antes de los sustantivos en plural y much y
States?
little antes de los sustantivos en singular.)
6. Yes, I'm going to buy dresses and shoes, but I'm
l. (many, much) people had cars, but (few, little) _ _ __ not going to buy hats.
used them every day. 7. 1 have money. (negativo)
2. How (many, much) apples did you buy? 8. Did you say that you didn't have money?
3. Picase give me a (little, few) more coffee. 9. 1 said that 1 have . (negativo)
4. Do you want a (Iittle, few) more sugar and cream? 10. He took money. (negativo) He took . (negativo)

196 197
 'f.'
1 '

EJERCICIO 7 5. Let's invite John _ __

Llene los espacios con anything, something, nothingy traduzca. 6. Can I buy this ____
7. l want to lie down ____ and go to sleep.

,,
l. Do you want for your birthday? 8. He's always going ___ _
2. No, don't give me for my birthday, but you can give me 1 l; 9. No one went ____ on Friday.
_______ for my saint's day. 10. Take me on Sunday.
1 3. 1 bought for your birthday. (afirmativo)
i. :.¡ 4. 1 didn't know that you had enough money to buy _ __
5. There was _ _ _ that we could do. (negativo) EJERCICIO 10
il 6. There was that we could do. (afirmativo) Llene los espacios y traduzca.
l 1•1 7. They said ____ ,(negativo)
!,1
8. I'm going to tell you _ _ _ . (afirmativo) l. Did yo u speak to (todos) ____ _
'iil, 9. Don't say _ __ 2. The children wanted to break (todo)
10. Isaid .(negativo) 3. Are yo u going to look (por todos lados) ?
4. (Todo el mundo) ____ put on his ha t.
5. Did she drop (todo)··---
EJERCICIO 8 6. It's very hot (por todas partes) _ _ _
7. (Todos) ____ has to bring something.
Llene los espacios con anybody (anyone), somebody (someone), no- 8. Did (todos) _ _ _ see (todo) ?
body (no one) y traduzca.
9. Did they loo k for hirn (por todas partes) ?
l. Did _ _ _ call me this aftcrnoon? 10. Is there room for (todos) ?
2. No, called you this afternoon, but _ _ _ called you this
morning.
3. Don't tell _ __ EJERCICIO 11
4. ____ called you. (negativo) Llene los espacios con la forma correcta de tos verbos say o tell y tra-
5. called yo u. (afirmativo) duzca.
6. I want to talk to ____ about this book.
7. There's here now. (negativo) l. I'm going you something on Sunday afternoon.
8. I'm looking for - - · - who can speak English. 2. Don't anything.
9. There's here who can speak English. (negativo) 3. He me that he couldn't understand what the teacher
1O. There isn't he re who can speak English. was ·-·-·--·
4. l know she understood what l because I her in
Spanish.
EJERCICIO 9 5. What are you going hirn?
6. What are you going them?
Llene los espacios con anywhere (any place), somewhere (sorne place), 7. They didn't want good-bye.
nowhere (no place) y traduzca. 8. Please the teacher that I can't cometo school today.
l. J ohn often invited us ___ _ 9. What is that man ?
2. John never invited us _ __ 10. He's us that he can't hear.
3. Did John ever invite us ?
4. John rarely invited us _ _ _

198 199
--,11,,1
: 1

EJERCICIO 12 113 261 575 10,000 1,580,000

1: Traduzca al español. 150
142nd Street
271
1st floor
595 15,000
6th floor
3,100,000
Aprill7, 1947
1
l. How much money do you have left? 58th Street 2nd floor 7th floor May 5, 1842
2. They had none left. 23rd Street 3rd floor 8th floor February 14, 1512
3. 1 don't have any left. 72nd Street 4th floor 9th floor November 3, 1603
i!,i 4. He has sorne apples left. 81st Street 5th floor 10th floor July 4, 1776
5. Is there a lot of money left?
if
,!;

'"1
6. Do you have anything left to eat?
1

7. Isn't there any food left? '

8. How much money did you have left after you bought that suit? ORTOGRAFIA
9. 1 didn't have any money left after 1 bought that suit.
10. Is there any time left? l. Cuando un verbo termina en y, precedida por una consonante, se
·11
cambia la y por i y se le agrega es para formar la tercera persona singu-
lar del presente. Ejemplos: he studies pero: he plays (precedido por
EJERCICIO 13 una vocal).
2. Cuando un verbo termina en sonido de s, sh, eh, x, se le agrega es
Traduzca las siguientes preguntas. Contéstelas en negativo, colocando para formar la tercera persona singular. Ejemplos: kiss (besar), kisses;
any more y any longer al final de la oración. wash, washes; reach, reaches; ftx, ftxes
Por regla general se coloca any more y any longer al final de la ora- 3. Cuando un verbo termina en y, precedida por una consonante, se
ción. cambia por i y se le agrega ed para formar el pasado. Ejemplos: he hur-
ried;pero: he played (precedido por una vocal).
l. Don't you !ove me any more? 4. Los sustantivos terminados en y, precedida por una consonante,
2. Don't you work there any more? forman su plural cambiando la y por i y agregando la terminación es.
3. Doesn't he live there any more? Ejemplos: city, cities family, families
4. Doesn't she see him any more? 5. Los sustantivos terminados en s, sh, eh, x forman su plural toman-
5. Don't you study English any more? do es. Ejemplos: dress, dresses fox, foxes
6. Don't you go to school any longer? 6. Los sustantivos terminados en fe forman su plural cambiando la f
7. Doesn't she teach Spanish any longer? por v y tomando s. Ejemplos: wife, wives knife, knives
8. Doesn't she like Mexico any longer? Muchos sustantivos terminados en f forman su plural cambiando la f
9. Don't they go to the movies any longer? por v y tomando es. Ejemplo: loaf, loaves
10. Don't you write to them any longer? 7. Si el verbo termina en e, se suprime ésta antes de agregar ing.
Ejemplos: give, giving come, coming
Verbos monosilabos que terminan en una sola consonante, prece-
EJERCICIO 14 dida de una sola vocal, duplicarán la consonante final antes de agregar
ing. Ejemplos: put, putting stop, stopping
Lea los siguientes números y fechas.
Esta regla se aplicará también a los verbos polis1labos cuando la últi-
one hundred cien ma silaba lleva el acento. Ejemplo: begin, beginning pero: visit, vis-
one thousand mil one million un millón (de) iting {lleva el acento en la primera sílaba).
103 8. Verbos monosilabos que terminan en una sola consonante, prece-
200 500 1,000 25,000
105 201 dida de una sola vocal, duplicarán la consonante final antes de agregar
50~ 1,003 50,000
110 ed. Ejemplos: drop, dropped stop, stopped
211 550 1,005 75,000
200 201
'! ! f'l' !:1111
1

Esta regla se aplicará también a los verbos polisilabos cuando la úl- 5. get 13. stop
tima sílaba lleva el acento. Ejemplos: refer (referir), referred pero: visit, 6. help 14. go
visited (lleva el acento en la primera sílaba). ¡; 7. drop 15. have
Todos los verbos regulares que duplican la consonante final para for- ~ 8. think 16. sleep
t.
mar el gerundio sufren el mismo cambio en la formación del pasado. 9. clean 17. give
10. turn on 18. reply
Ejemplos: drop, dropping, dropped stop, stopping, stopped.
11. do 19. take
12. live 20. write
1 'i EJERCICIO 15
1¡1 Escriba el plural de estos sustantivos.
1

EJERCICIO 16
1
l. city - - - - - 7. way _ __
Práctica Verbal
111'
2. country - - - 8. dress _ __
!
3. boy ____ 9. day _ __ l. 1 always break the eggs.
4. fox _ __ 10. wife _ __ 2. 1 don't always break the eggs.
5. family - - - - 11. knife _ __ 3. Do 1 ever break the eggs?
6. birthday - - - 12. loaf _ __ 4. Don't 1 ever break the eggs?
5. Why don't 1 ever break the eggs?
Escriba la tercera persona singular de estos verbos. 6. 1 broke the pitcher.
7. 1 didn't break the pitcher.
1. study -- -- 4. buy - - - - 8. Did 1 break the pitcher?
2. try 5. hurry -- - - 9. Didn't 1 break the pitcher?
3. play--- - 10. Why didn't 1 break the pitcher?
11. I'm breaking everything.
Escriba el pasado de estos verbos. En algunos se duplica la consonante 12. I'm not breaking everything.
final antes de agregar ed. En otros se cambia y por i antes de agregar ed. 13. Am 1 breaking everything?
A otros solamente se agrega ed o d. 14. Am 1 not breaking everything?
15. Why am 1 breaking everything?
l. drop ____ 9. play _ __ 16. 1 was breaking something.
2. look _ _ _ 10. listen (to) _ __ 17. 1 wasn't breaking anything.
3. jump _ __ 11. try _ __
18. Was 1 breaking anything?
4. pick out ____ 12. fonn ____ 19. Wasn't 1 breaking anything?
5. study _ __ 13. walk _ _ _ 20. What was 1 breaking?
6. live _____ 14. stop _ __ 21. 1 can break it.
7. hurry _ __ 15. wait (for) _ __ 22. 1 can't break it.
8. turnoff _ __ 16. answer _ __ 23. Can 1 break it?
24. Can't 1 break it?
Escriba el gerundio de estos verbos. A algunos se le suprime la e, a algu-
25. Why can't 1 break it?
nos se le duplica la consonante final, y a otros solamente se le agre-
26. 1 could break these plates.
s<~ ing.
27. 1 couldn't break these plates.
l. run _ _ __ 3. play- 28. Could 1 break these plates?
2. be ____ 4. try 29. Couldn 't 1 break these plates?

202 203
,,,,¡11 1
l ¡il1
1

1. i,l:l
!'¡:1'
i,'
:
'· 11 30. Why couldn't 1 break these plates? EJERCICIO 19
¡!¡'
31. 1 like to break them.
32. 1 don't like to break them. Escriba en inglés.
33. Do 1 like to break them? l. A él le gusta dormir más que nada.
34. Don't 1 like to break them? 2. Les di a ellos mucho dinero el martes, pero hoy les queda muy poco.
35. Why don't 1 like to break them? 3. Prueba otra vez. No te des por vencido ahora.
,1 4. Ellos trajeron mucha comid~ y había suficiente para todos.
1'
1
5. ¿A alguien le dio sed mientras que ellos estaban caminando?
EJERCICIO 17 6. Lo siento, pero ya no te quiero.
11¡

¡; (' Práctica Verbal Repita el ejercicio 76, usando formas de los verbos
try, drop, give up, pickup, pick out, reach, get thirsty (sleepy, hungry,
1'¡1' cold, etc.) en oraciones cortas. Use un sustantivo o pronombre dis-
tinto con cada verbo. Use las palabras interrogativas why y where
cuando sea posible.
7. Escogimos muchas cosas para los niños, ¿verdad?
8. Tampoco estudió el hermano de Juan.
9. Le quedan a mi abuelita solamente unos pocos años, y la quiero
visitar más a menudo.
10. Aquella vaca negra no conoce el camino del granero.

EJERCICIO 18 EJERCICIO 20
Lea y traduzca. Dictado

l. Do you like a lot of cream and sugar in your coffee?

2. 1 like plenty of sugar but very little cream.
THE CROW AND THE PITCHER 3. We have a great deal oftime. Do you want to go to the movies?
4. No, 1 don't like the movies any more. 1 want to sleep for a few min-
A crow, walking through the woods on a very hot day, got so utes if we have enough time left.
thirsty that he wanted a drink ofwater more than anythlng else. 5. He tried three times and then gave u p.
He was very happy when he found a pitcher under a tree; but, when 6. l'm going to take sorne water because 1 have an idea that it's going
he looked in the pitcher, he saw that it had only a little water left in it. to be very hot.
He tried to put his head through the mouth of the pitcher and reach 7. We got so thirsty that we had to drink that dirty water.
the water with his bill, but the mouth was so small that he couldn't put 8. Don't drop those rocks on the floor.
his head through it. 9. How much money did you have left after you bought your books?
Then the crow tried to break the pitcher, but he wasn't strong e- 10. Did everybody have enough time to finish?
nough. "1 can reach the water," he said, "but 1 have to think of a way
first."
So the crow sat down and thought. He was almost ready to give up EJERCICIO 21
when he had an idea. There were a lot of little stones around the pitch- Conversación Conteste las siguientes preguntas.
er, and the crow thought of a way to use these stones to help him get
the water. l. Do yo u have a great de al of time to study?
He picked up a stone in his bill and dropped it into the pitcher. Then 2. Do you drink a great deal ofwater?
he picked up another and another and dropped them into the pitcher. 3. Does he speak a lot of English?
After a while the water reached the top ofthe pitcher, and the crow 4. Do yo u write a lot of letters?
drank all the water. 5. Do you drink a lot of coffee?

204 205
 .....
'1
11

6. Do you eat lots of candy?

7. Are there lots of faetones on this street?
8. Does she have enough money?
9. ls the table big enough?
10. Do you have plenty?

~'tttjllltllllll•itt
11. Is there plenty of time?

i!, Conteste las siguientes preguntas en negativo.

11,
12. Don't you speak English any longer?
iii!Jiés-es1111Útll
11

::

!¡
13. Don't you live close to the school any longer?
1

'¡1,
14. Don't you need my book any more?
l¡¡
1,
15. Don't you listen to the radio any more?
16. Don't you help your mother any more?
17. Don't you teach English any more? A
Conteste las siguientes preguntas en afirmativo y en negativo. a un,uno,una
about acerca de, de; answered
18. Do you have any bread left? como; aproximadamente any algún; alguno(s)
19. Is there any butter left? above arriba, not. .. any no ... ninguno(s)
20. Do we have any meat left? (de) arriba de anybody alguien; cualquiera
21. Do you see anything? across al otro lado de not... anybody no ... nadie
22. Do you hear anything? adjective adjetivo anyone alguien; cualquiera
23. Did he go any place? adverb adverbio not ... anyone no ... nadie
24. Did you see anybody? affirmative afirmativo any place alguna parte;
25. Did you visit anybody? afraid: to be very afraid of cualquier lugar
tener (mucho) miedo a, de not. .. any place no ...
after después (de que) ninguna parte
aftemoon tarde anything algo; cualquier cosa
again otra vez, de nuevo not. .. anything no ... nada
all todo( a, os, as) an};where alguna parte;
almost casi cualquier lugar
always siempre not ... anywhere no ... ninguna
am: 1 am soy, estoy apple manzana parte
American americano April abril
among entre around alrededor de
an un,uno,una as mientras, cuando
and y (to) ask preguntar: to ask a
angry enojado question hacer una
animal animal pregunta; to ask
another otro about preguntar por
(to) answer contestar asked
answered asked

206 207
·n~,~,~~~~~~
,¡ i

'!11
( to) ask pedir (a alguien) black negro cleaned day día; the day after

'
asked blanks espacios cleaned tomorrow pasado
asked blue azul elose (to) cerca (de) mañana; the day
(to) ask for pedir (algo) book libro (to) elose cerrar before yesterday
asked for both ambos closed anteayer
} asked for boy muchacho closed December diciembre
asleep dormido bread pan; a loaf of coffee café desk escritorio
at a;en bread un pan (de caja) cold frío; catarro; I'm (very) (to) dictate dictar
!¡.:li¡!
aunt tía (to) break romper cold tengo (mucho) frío; dictated
i' 1
H auxiliary auxiliar broke 1 have a cold tengo dictated
:,
broken 1 catarro; it's (very) cold dining room comedor
1
1,
B breakfast desayuno hace (mucho) frío dinner comida principal
( to) bring traer colony colonia dirty sucio
bad malo brought (to) come venir (to) do hacer
bam granero brought carne did
bathroom baño brother hermano come done
(to) be ser; estar brown color café (to) come back regresar doctor doctor
was, were busy ocupado (de allá para acá) dog perro
been but pero, sino cameback dollar dólar
( to) be about tratar de butter mantequilla come back door puerta
was, were about (to) buy comprar comfortable cómodo down abajo
been about bought (to) complete completar dress vestido
beautiful bello, hermoso bought completed (to) drink beber
because porque by por, frente a completed drank
(to) become llegar a ser, conversation conversación drunk
hacerse, volverse, e (to) correct corregir (to) drop tirar, caérsele
ponerse cake pastel corrected a uno
became (to) call llamar corrected dropped
become called could pudo, podía dropped
bed cama called country país, campo
bedroom recámara can poder cousin primo
before antes de candy dulces cow vaca E
(to) begin empezar car coche cream crema
began chair silla crow cuervo
begun (to) change cambiar each cada
cup taza early temprano
hehind detrás de changed
curtain cortina easy fácil
beside aliado de changed
(to) cut cortar
besides además (de) child niño, niña; hijo, hija (to) eat comer
cut
between entre children niños, niñas; hijos ate
cut
big grande; alto city ciudad eaten
bill billete; cuenta; pico clean limpio D egg huevo
birthday cumpleailos (to) clean limpiar daughter hija eight ocho

208 209
1 t
~·
·-r¡.-,'~11111!:
! . lj
. ¡,1
!¡
1 1
1'.', 1
:111

eighteen dieciocho (to) finish acabar, terminar got angry (at) gold oro; de oro
eighty ochenta finished got angry (at) golden de oro, dorado
eleven once finished (to) get mad (at) good bueno
English inglés first primero enojarse (con) good-bye adiós
enough suficiente five cinco got mad (at) goose gansa, oca
ever alguna vez, a veces; fi.X arreglar got mad (at) (to) go out salir
not. .. ever nunca fiXed (to) get rich hacerse rico, went out
¡¡1 every cada fi.Xed enriquecerse gone out
1'
everywhere ( every place) floor piso, suelo got rich (to) go to bed acostarse
por, a, en todas partes flower flor got rich went to bed
1:11
everybody todo el mundo, todos following siguiente (to) get sleepy entrarle a gone to bed
11
everything todo, todas las cosas food alimento uno sueñ.:> (to) go to sleep dormirse
1

1' exercise ejercicio for para, por got sleepy went to sleep
eye ojo forest bosque got sleepy gone to sleep
(to) forget olvidar (to) get to llegar a grandfather abuelo
F forgot gotto grandmother abuela
forgotten gotto grandparents abuelos
fork tenedor (to) get here, there llegar green verde
factory fábrica (to) form formar got here, there
family familia formed got here, there
far (from) lejos (de) H
formed (to) get thirsty darle a uno sed
farm granja four cuatro got thirsty
farmer granjero fourteen catorce happy feliz, contento
got thirsty
fast rápido; aprisa fourth cuarto (to) get up levantarse hard duro, difícil; mucho
father padre, papá forty cuarenta got up (adv.)
February febrero fox zorro got up hat sombrero
(to) feel sentir Friday viernes girl muchacha (to) have tener, haber
felt friend amigo (to) give dar; regalar had
felt from de gave had
fence cerca, barda given hay heno
few pocos (to) give up darse por vencido; he él
field campo G renunciar head cabeza
~
1: fifteen quince gave up (to) hear oír
1~ fifth quinto
fifty cincuenta
garage garaje; taller
garden jardín
given up heard
H!'
glass vidrio; cristal; vaso heard
(to) fdl llenar gas gas (to) go ir heDo hola
filled geese gansos went (to) help ayudar
fdled ( to) get conseguir gone helped
(to) find encontrar got (to) go back regresar helped
found got (de acá para allá) her su(s) de ella;
found (to) get angry (at) wentback la (pron. obj.)
fine bueno, muy bien enojarse (con) gone back here aquí, acá

210 211
 hers el suyo, los suyos invited (to) leam aprender M
(de ella) is es, está leamed
mad enojado
him lo, le (pron. obj.) it lo, la (cosa) leamed
(to) make hacer
his su(s) de él; el suyo, its su (cosa) (to) leave dejar; salir; marcharse;
made
los suyos (de él) irse
made
ho~ne hogar,casa left
man hombre, seftor
ho~nework tarea (de J left
manger pesebre
11'

il¡,i escuela) (to) let dejar

many muchos(as)
hot caliente; l'~n (very) hot January enero let
!1 March marzo
tengo (mucho) calor; it's July juüo let May mayo
·¡1
(very) hot hace (mucho) calor June junio letter carta; letra
me me (pron. obj.)
hotel hotel (to)jump saltar, brincar (to) lie down recostarse · ~neat carne
llil laydown
',
hour hora jumped (to) ~neet encontrar(se)
house casa jumped laindown
(personas); conocer
how ¿cómo? li¡ht luz; claro; ligero
(personas por
how many ¿cuántos? (to) like gustar, simpatizar
K primera. vez)
how ~nuch ¿cuánto? liked met
hundred: one hundred liked met
cien(to) (to) kiD matar (to) listen (to) escuchar
men hombres
hungry: to be (very) hungry kiDed listened (to)
tener (mucha) hambre listened (to) metal metal
kiDed
(to) hurry apresurarse kind clase; amable little pequefio, chico; Mexican mexicano
hurried kitchen cocina poco Mexico México
il:llll
hurried knife cuchillo (to) live vivir milk leche
husband esposo knives cuchillos lived nüllion millón (de)
(to) know saber, conocer lived JDine el mío, la mía, los míos
1¡1'11 1 knew living roo~n sala las ~nías
known long largo JDinute minuto
(to)look(at) mirar; fijarse (en) Miss seftorita
1 yo looked (at) (con apellido)
idea idea L looked (at) ~noney dinero
idio~n modismo (to) look for buscar ~nonth mes
if si looked for ~nore más
last último, pasado
in en, dentro de last na~ne apellido looked for ~noming maftana
infinitive infinitivo last night anoche (to) look out (of) asomarse (por) ~nother madre,mamá
in front of adelante de, last week la semana pasada looked out (of) ~nouth boca; pico; hocico
enfrente de (to) laugh (at) reírse (de) looked out (of) ~novie película
interesting interesante laughed (at) (to) lose perder ~novies cine; películas
interrogative interrogativo laughed (at) lost Mr. seftor (con apellido)
into al, en (to) lay eggs poner huevos lost Mrs. seftora (con apellido)
(to) invite invitar laideggs (to) love amar, querer much mucho(a)
invited laideggs loved my mi(s)
loved
212 213
1íl .
11
,,·\''
!1
.
1

N old viejo, anciano

on en, sobre place lugar read
name nombre
;¡1·1
once una vez (to) place colocar ready listo
!1! narrow estrecho, angosto
one uno placed record player tocadiscos
near cerca (de)
only solamente; único placed red rojo
(to) need necesitar
(to) open abrir plate plato (to) reply contestar
needed
opened please por favor replied
11 needed
opened plenty (of) bastante replied
negative negativo
'1'
or o plural plural rich rico
never nunca, jamás
'¡::,1
other otro poor pobre rock roca
new nuevo
'1' '\'
our nuestro (a, os, as) (to) put poner, meter room cuarto; lugar
11
1

next próximo
1 ¡' next to junto a ours el nuestro, la nuestra, put (to) ron correr
los nuestros, las put ran
nice bonito; simpático,
11,1'1
(to) put on ponerse ron
'1¡ agradable nuestras
puton rug alfombra, tapete
night noche out afuera
nine nueve out of fuera de put on
nineteen diecinueve outside afuera, fuera de possessive posesivo S
ninety noventa over sobre, por, directa- potato papa
no no; ningún mente encima de (to) practice practicar
over here para acá, practiced sad triste
nobody nadie, ninguna
hacia acá, por acá practiced same mismo
persona
over there para allá preposition preposición Saturday sábado
none ninguno
hacia allá, por allá present tense tiempo presente saucer plato (de taza)
no one nadie, ninguna
pronoun pronombre (to) say decir
persona
pronunciation pronunciación said
no place ninguna parte
p pure puro said
not no
school escuela
notebook cuaderno
nothing nada page página Q second segundo
parents padres (to) see ver
noun sustantivo
( to) pass pasar question pregunta saw
November noviembre
passed seen
now ahora
passed seldom rara vez
nowhere ninguna parte
past tense tiempo pasado R selfish (adj.) egoísta
number número
pen pluma (to) sell vender
pencil lápiz rabbit conejo sold
o people gente race carrera; raza sold
phone teléfono radio radio sentence oración
phrase frase rarely rara vez September septiembre
object complemento;
objeto (to) pick out escoger (to) reach llegar a; alcanzar (to) set poner
October octubre picked out reached set
of de picked out reached set
office oficina (to) read leer (to) set the table poner la mesa
picture cuadro, retrato;
often a menudo película read set the table

214 215
·~ . 1 -
11t the table son hijo
11ven siete (to) take off quitarse thought about (of)
soon pronto
aeventeen diecisiete took off thought about ( of)
soup sopa
seventy setenta taken off third tercero
Spanish español (to) take out sacar
shallow poco profundo (to) speak hablar, platicar thirsty: to be (very) thirsty
she ella took out tener (mucha) sed
spoke taken out
shoe zapato spoken this este, esta; esto
short corto; chaparro (to) talk hablar; platicar this one éste, ésta
spoon cuchara talked
(to) show enseñar; mostrar (to) stand up pararse those esos, esas;
11
showed talked aquellos, aquellas;
stood up tall alto
showed stood up ésos, ésas;
11/,:
sick enfermo (to) teach enseñar aquéllos, aquéllas
(to) start empezar taught
singular singular started thousand mil
taught three tres
11'
1
sister hermana started
(to) sit (down) sentarse teacher profesor thirteen trece
state estado telephone teléfono
sat (down) stone piedra through por, a través de
(to) tell decir, contar Thursday jueves
sat (down) (to) stop detener (se) told time tiempo; hora; vez
six seis stopped told tired cansado
sixteen dieciséis stopped ten diez to a; hasta
sixty sesenta store tienda
(to) sleep dormirse thanks gracias today hoy
stork cigüeña that que; lo que, ese, esa;
slept story cuento tomorrow mañana
slept aquel, aquella; eso, tonight esta noche
stove estufa aquello
sleepy: to be (very) sleepy street calle too también; demasiado
that one ése, ésa; aquél, too much demasiado
tener (mucho) sueño strong fuerte
slow lento, despacio aquélla too many demasiados
student alumno, theirs el suyo, los suyos
slowly lentamente estudiante top parte superior
(de ellos o ellas) toward hacia
small pequeño, chico (to) study estudiar them los, las (pron. obj.) (to) translate traducir
so así es que; para que; studied then entonces;después translated
por lo tanto; tan studied
there allí, allá translated
so much tanto sugar azúcar
there is (sing.) hay tree árbol
so many tantos suit traje there are (plural) hay (to) try tratar, probar
sorne algún, alguno(s) Sunday domingo
there was (sing.) había, hubo tried
somebody alguien, alguna supper cena, merienda
persona there were (plural) había, hubo tried
sweet dulce these estos, estas;
someone alguien, alguna Tuesday martes
persona éstos; éstas (to) turn off apagar, cerrar, parar
T they ellos, ellas
sorne place alguna parte turned off
something algo, alguna thing cosa tumed off
table mesa (to) think pensar, creer
cosa (to) take llevar, tornar (to) turn on poner, encender,
thought prender, abrir
sometimes algunas veces took thought turned on
somewhere alguna parte taken (to) think about (of) pensar en turned on
216 217
~
r

' turtle tortuga

twelve doce
twenty veinte; twenty-
one veintit;no;
twenty-two
(to) wake up despertar(se)
wokeup
wokeup
(to) walk caminar
walked
window ventana
with con
without sin
woman mujer, señorita,
señora
y
yard patio; espacio que
rodea una casa
year año
veintidós walked women mujeres yes sí
two dos; two hundred wall pared wood madera yesterday ayer
doscientos (to) want querer woods bosque(s) you tú, Ud., Uds.
wanted word palabra young joven
u wanted young man (el) joven
warm caliente; I'm (very) (to) work trabajar young woman (la) joven
uncle tío warm tengo (mucho) calor; worked your su(s) de Ud. o de Uds.
under debajo de it's (very) warm hace (mucho) calor worked yours el tuyo, la tuya, los
(to) understand entender (to) wash lavar(se) (to) write escribir tuyos, las tuyas: el
understood washed wrote suyo, la suya, los
understood washed written suyos, las suyas (de
United States Estados (to) watch TV ver televisión Ud. o de Uds.)
Unidos watched TV
until hasta watched TV
up arriba, hacia arriba water agua
up to hasta way manera, modo
(to) use usar we nosotros
used weak débil
used (to) wear llevar (ropa o joyería)
usually usualmente wore
wom
Wednesday miércoles
V week semana
well bien
vase florero what ¿qué?; lo que
very muy when cuando
(to) visit visitar where donde
visited which que; ¿cuál?
visited while rato; mientras que
vocabulary vocabulario white blanco
who ¡,quién?; ¿quiénes?
whom prep. + quién
w why ¿por qué?
wife esposa
(to) wait (for) esperar (to) win ganar (de jugar)
waited (for) won
waited (for) won

218 219
'
~
~

La publicación de esta obra la realizó

Editorial Trillas, 5. A. de C. V

División Administrativa, Av. Río Churubusco 385,

Col. Gral. Pedro María Anaya, C. P. 03340, México, D. f
Tel. 56884233, FAX 56041364

División Comercial, Calzada. de la Viga 1132, C. P. 09439

México, D. f Tel. 56330995, FAX 56330870

5e Imprimió en
Impresora y Editora Xalco, 5. A. de C. V
AO 75 TRW